Tải bản đầy đủ (.doc) (145 trang)

giao an

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (747.35 KB, 145 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

<b>P.D:15.8.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>1</b>

:

<b>Revision 1</b>


T.D:



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


- Revising the main grammar notes that Sts learnt in grade 11: Past tenses and conditional sentences


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Integrated, mainly communicative
- Pair and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: notebooks


- Teacher: handouts and lesson plan



<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5
- Chatting


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T gives sts handouts
- Sts study exercise 1
- Sts work in pairs


- Sts compare with another
Couple


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study exercise 2
- Sts work in pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study exercise 3
- Sts work in groups
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Exercise 1</b> (Handout):<i><b> Put the correct form of the verbs in brackets</b></i>


- Feed back and give the correct answers


1- had finished / sat 6- was cooking / lost / came
2- will build 7- was coming / went / fell
3- met / had worked 8- were playing


4- have spent / retired 9- had discussed / wrote
5- told / had already bought


<b>2. Exercise 2 </b>(Handout):<i><b> Put the correct form of the verbs in brackets</b></i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- knew 4- don’t take


2- wouldn’t make 5- had been / would have gone
3- find 6- would have had



<b>3. Exercise 3 </b>(Handout): <i><b>Rewrite these sentences in conditional </b></i>
<i><b>sentences.</b></i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- If he had listened to his parents, he’d have passed the exam.


2- If the thief hadn’t left his gloves at the scence, he wouldn’t have been
arrested.


3- If I had known you were coming to Ha Noi, I wouldn’t have gone on
holiday.


4- If she had taken a taxi to the meeting, she wouldn’t have been late.
5- If the woman had said what she wanted, I wouldn’t have put the phone
down.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


-Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo excercises at home


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

<b>Handout 1</b>



<b>1. Exercise 1: Put the correct form of the verbs in brackets</b>


1. After she (finish) dinner she (sit) down to listen to some music.


2. They (build) a house next year.


3. When I (meet) him he (work) as a waiter for a year or so.
4. I (spend) a lot of time since I (retire).


5. Hoa (tell) Nam that she couldn’t go to the cinema, but Nam (already/ buy) the tickets.


6. I (cook) dinner when suddenly we (lose) all the power. But it (come) on again after about ten minutes.
7. Kim (come) down the stairs when the lights (go) out. She almost (fall) over.


8. Quang and I (play) table tennis at the time.


9. After we (discuss) the project on the phone, I (write) my boss a letter about it.


<b>2. Exercise 2: Put the correct form of the verbs in brackets</b>


1. If I (know) his address, I’d give it to you.


2. If he worked more slowly, he (not/ make) so many mistakes.
3. I will ride you to the station if I (find) my motorbike key.
4. If you (not take) the bus, you will miss the train.


5. If the weather (be) nice yesterday, we (go) to the beach.


6. If you had come on holiday with us, you (have) a wonderful time.


<b>3. Exercise 3: Rewrite these sentences in conditional sentences.</b>


1. He didn’t listen to his parents so he didn’t pass the exam.
2. The thief left his gloves at the scence so he was arrested.



3. I didn’t know you were coming to Ha Noi, so I went on holiday.
4. She didn’t take a taxi to the meeting, so she was late.


5- The woman didn’t say what she wanted, so I didn’t put the phone down.


<b>P.D:16.8.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>2</b>

:

<b>Revision 2</b>


T.D:



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


- Revising the main grammar notes that Sts learnt in grade 11: Gerund and to infinitive, relative clauses,
clept sentences.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Integrated, mainly communicative


- Pair and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: notebooks


- Teacher: handouts and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T gives sts handouts
- Sts study exercise 1
- Sts work individually


<b>1.Exercise 1</b> (Handout)


<i><b>Use the correct form of the verb in bracket with gerund or infinitive</b></i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study exercise 2
- Sts work in pairs


- Sts compare with another
couple


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study exercise 3
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


1- spending / earning 5- to learn / saying


2- repeat / to make / to do 6- trying / to interrupt / to wait / talking
3- looking / being 7- leaving / to go



4- to put / to prevent / climbing 8- waiting / to clear / to set


<b>2.Exercise 2 </b>(Handout)


<i><b>Combine these sentences using relative pronouns</b></i>
- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- There was a journalist there whose work took her to lots of different
countries.


2- I talked to the woman whose car had broken down on the way to the
party.


3- The church which our class visited yesterday is 200 years old.
4- Who was that boy who you were with this morning?


5- The film which I watched last night was interesting.


6- The train which we traveled on was full of passengers and goods.
7- The flat my family used to live in was very old.


<b>3.Exercise 3 </b>(Handout)


<i><b>Rewrite these sentences using cleft sentences</b></i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- It was the neighbor that told them about it.
2- It was the strong wind that blew the roof off.
3- It was the man that the woman answered rudely.
4- It was the money that he borrowed from An.


5- It was when he was 26 that he got married.
6- It was on the way to school that I met him.
7- It was at weekends that they often had parties.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


-Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo excercise at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 1 – A- Reading


<b>Handout 2</b>



<b>1. Exercise 1: Use the correct form of the verb in bracket with gerund or infinitive</b>


1. Most people prefer (spend) money to (earn) it.


2. He made me (repeat) his instructions (make) sure that I understood what I was (do) after he had gone.
3. Why do you keep (look) back? Are you afraid of (be) followed?


4. He decided (put) broken glass on the top of his wall (prevent) boys from (climb) over it.
5. You still have a lot (learn) if you forgive my (say) so.


6. It’s no use (try) (interrupt) him. You’ll have (wait) till he stops (talk).


7. He didn’t like (leave) the children alone in the house but he had no alternative as he had (go) out to
work.



8. We got tired of (wait) for the weather (clear) and finally decided (set) out in the rain.


<b>2. Exercise 2: Combine these sentences using relative pronouns</b>


1- There was a journalist there. Her work took her to lots of different countries.
2- I talked to the woman. Her car had broken down on the way to the party.
3- The church is 200 years old. Our class visited it yesterday


4- Who was that boy? You were with him this morning.
5- The film was interesting. I watched it last night


6- The train was full of passengers and goods. We traveled on it.
7- The flat was very old. My family used to live in it.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

1- The neighbor told them about it.
2- The strong wind blew the roof off.
3- The woman answered the man rudely.
4- He borrowed the money from An.


5- He got married when he was 26 years old.
6- I met him on the way to school.


7- They often had parties at weekends.


<b>P.D:17.8.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>3: Unit 1: </b>

<b>Home life</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 1</b>

<b>: </b>

A - Reading


<i><b>Clas</b></i>



<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Reading a passage about a family and doing exercises about it.


2. Education: - Being aware of sharing the household chores among members in the family.
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Integrated, mainly communicative
- Pair, group and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>


<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5
- Chatting about sts’ families


- Set the scence


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts describe the picture
- Sts answer the questions
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts read through the
passage then find out new
words


- T gives the meaning of the


new words


- Sts pronounce after T


<b>1. Before you read (page 12)</b>


<i>* Ask and answer these questions about the picture</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers
1- at home


2- The mother is helping the daughter study, the father is playing with the
son.


3- Yes, it is


<i>* Presenting the new words</i>


- biologist (n) nhµ sinh vËt häc


- caring (a) quan tâm đến ngời khác


- to join hand (v) hợp sức lại


- attempt(n) sự cố gắng


- household chore (n) việc nhà


- garbage (n) rác, ruột thú



- mischievous (a) tinh quái


- obedient (a) dễ bảo, ngoan


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task 2
- Sts work in pairs


- Sts answer the questions
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts work in groups
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- supportive (a) khuyÕn khÝch, ñng hé
<b>2. While you read (page 13-14)</b>


<i><b>a. Task 1(page 14)</b></i>


<i>Choose the sentence A, B, or C the is nearest in meaning to the sentence </i>
<i>given</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- B 3- A 5- A
2- C 4- B


<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 14)</b></i>


<i>Answer the questions</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers


1- Very busy. They have to work long hours and sometimes they have to
work at night.


2- She is always the first one to get up in the morning to make sure that
her children leave home for school having eaten breakfast and dressed in
suitable clothes. She always makes dinner ready before her husband
comes home.


3- The daughter helps with household chores: She washes the dishes and
takes out the garbage. She also looks after the boys/ her younger brothers.
The father sometimes cooks or mends things around the house at


weekends.



4- She attempts to win a place at university.


5- Because they are very close-knit and supportive of one another. They
often share their feelings and whenever problems come up, they discuss
them frankly and find solutions quickly.


<b>3. After you read (page 14)</b>


<i>Compare the family described in the text with your own family.</i>


- Feedback
…………..


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice reading at home
- Redo excercise at home


- Do exercise part: Reading in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 1 – B- Speaking


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>18.8.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>4: Unit 1: </b>

<b>Home life</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 2</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>b - speaking</b>




<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Asking, answering and discussing about the family life, relationship and responsibility
of each member in the family.


2. Education: - Being aware of the importance of the family.
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Integrated, mainly communicative
- Pair, the whole classwork


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>


<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5
- Talk about the family and your family life.


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1st<sub>)</sub>


2- Read the passage then do task 2 (1st<sub>)</sub>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study task 1 and find
out any grammar notes
- Sts work in pairs to speak
those sentences


- T calls sts to talk aloud
about those.


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2



- T guides sts to make
WH-questions before class
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task 3
- St works with different
partner


- T goes around and collects
mistakes


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps


<b>1. Task 1(page 15)</b>


<i>Read the following sentences and tick (V) the one that apply to you and </i>
<i>your family.</i>



<i><b>*Grammar notes:</b></i>


+ share household chore
+ share an interest closely
+ share personal secrets
- Feedback


………….


<b>2. Task 2 (page 15)</b>


<i>Prepare a list of questions to ask another student to find out whether his/ </i>
<i>her family life is like yours. You want to know:</i>


<i><b>* Notes: </b></i>WH-questions


1- WH- + Vs, es + O? (WH – as S)


Ex: Who lives with you? – My parents live with me.
What happens to you? – Nothing.


2- WH- + do/ does + S + V ? ( WH – as O )
Ex: When do you get up? – at 6.00


Who does she take to school every day? – Her daughter
- Feedback and give suggested questions


1- Who works in your family?


2- Who does the household chores in your family?


3- What is your responsibility in your family?


4- Which interest do your family members share closely?
5- Who do you often share your secrets with?


6- Who do you talk to before making an important decision?


<b>3. Task 3 (page 15)</b>


<i>Use the questions you have formed to ask your partner about his/ her life.</i>
<i>Note down the answers in the table.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested questions


1- both parents 2- my mother and I
3- to wash the dishes 4- watching TV
5- my father 6- both my parents


<b>4. Task 4 (page 4)</b>


<i>Go back to your original pair. Tell each other the information you have </i>
<i>collected.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

- T calls sts to talk about


their answers The interest they share closely is watching TV. He often shares his secrets with his father and he talks to his parents before making an
important decision



<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice speaking at home


- Do exercise part: Speaking in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 1 – C- Listening


<b>P.D:19.8.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>5: Unit 1: </b>

<b>Home life</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 3</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>C- listening</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Listening to a conversation between Paul and Andrea about their families and their
effects on their life then doing the tasks.


2. Education: - Being aware of the importance of the family
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>



- Integrated, mainly communicative


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Report the information you collected in task 3 (2sts)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts describe the picture


after T’s suggestions
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- T gives new words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T
- Sts study task 1 carefully


<b>1. Before you listen (page 16)</b>


<i>* Look at the picture below and describe what is happening in it.</i>


+ Give suggested questions


1- What’s happening in the picture?


2- How many people are there in the picture?
3- How are they feeling? / How do they look?
+ Feedback and give suggested answers
1- A family is having a big meal.
2- 9 people


3- Very happy.



<i>* Presenting new words</i>


- reserved


- to spread out (v) tr¶i ra


- leftovers (n) đồ ăn thừa
<i>* Listen and repeat</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again once and
check


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully
- T explains task 2


- Listen to the disk twice
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task
- T explains the task
- Sts work in groups
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


<i><b>a. Task 1(page 16)</b></i>


<i>True or false ( T/ F)</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- F (I’ve booked a flight for tomorrow)
2- F (I haven’t decided yet)


3- F (180 km)
4- T


5- T


<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 17)</b></i>


<i>Listen again and note down two things that are different about Paul’s </i>
<i>and Andrea’s families.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers


Paul Andrea


- His family members are not - His is close-knit family.
very close-knit.


- The family often eat the meal - The family often go out to eat
the mother cooks at home . when they get together.


<b>3. After you listen (page 17)</b>


<i>Discuss the importance of the family in a person’s life.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers


* Family is more important than things because it can’t be replaced. It
gives you love, support ….


* For lower students: Talk about their family by answering these
questions.


1- How many people are there in your family?
2- Do all members of your family live together?
3- Do they often get together on special occasions?
4- Do you often have big meals together?


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice listening at home



- Prepare for the next period: Unit 1 – D – Writing


<b>P.D:20.8.2010</b>

<b>§6: Unit 1: </b>

<b>Home life</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 4</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>d - writing</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Writing a letter to a friend about your family and your family rules.
2. Education: - Being aware of the importance of the family.


3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Integrated, mainly communicative


- Individual and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

- Greeting


- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Talk about your family. (2 sts)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task 1 and
find out any grammar notes
-T reviews the grammar
notes


- T explains examples
- Sts work in groups
Sts discuss and write
- T goes around and helps


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2
- T explains task 2
- Sts work in groups
- Sts discuss and write
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts write their writing
individually.


- T collects some writings


<b>1. Task 1(page 17)</b>


<i>What rules do you have in your family? Discuss these topics and add </i>
<i>others. Use the following verbs and expressions:</i>


* Grammar notes:


- Let sb do st Eg: My parents let me go out until 9 P.M.


- Allow sb to do st - Eg: My parents allow me to go out with my friend.
* Suggested phrases:



- I have to ……….


- My parents want me to ……….
- They allow me to …………


* Feedback and give suggested answers:


- During the school year, I’m not allowed to watch TV until I have
finished my homework.


- In my family everyone has to do their share of the household chores.
- In my family, everyone isn’t allowed to come home late at night.
- My mother has to prepare meals.


- We aren’t allowed to talk on the phone after 9 P.M.
- I’m not allowed to use the family motorbike.


- My parents let me go out with my friends before 9 P.M.
………….


<b>2. Task 2 (page 17)</b>


<i>Use the ideas you have discussed above to write a letter to a pen pal </i>
<i>about your family rules. </i>


- Feedback and give a suggested writing.


Every family has its own rules. Mine has a few. First, I’m not allowed to
watch TV until I have finished my homework. My parents don’t permit
me to come home late. My mother always prepares meals. And my


parents don’t let me use the family motorbike. In my family everyone has
to do their share of the household chores. We aren’t allowed to talk on
the phone after 9 P.M. My parents let me go out with my friends before 9
P.M….


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice writing at home


- Do exercise part: Writing in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 1 – E – Language focus


<b>P.D:31.8.2010</b>

<b>§7</b>

<b>: Unit 1: </b>

<b>Home life</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 5</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>E </b>

<b> language focus</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

1. Knowledge: - Pronunciation: The ending “S”


- Grammar: Tense revision: past simple, past progressive and present perfect
2. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Integrated, mainly communicative
- Individual, pair and the whole class work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>



1- Read the writing at home. (2 sts)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T pronounces the sounds
as a model


- T explains the sounds
- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts practice


- Sts study exercise 1
- T explains the main points
- Sts work in pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study exercise 2
- Sts do exercise
individually


- Sts compare with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes



<b>1. Pronunciation(page 18) : /s/ & /z/</b>
<i><b>a, Notes</b></i>


- S is pronounced /s/ if verbs and nouns end in these consonant sounds:
/k/, /t/, /p/, /f/ and //


Eg: stops, students, laughs, books, lengths, bathes, maps, ….


- S is pronounced /z/ if verbs and nouns end in vowel sounds and other
consonants except /s/, /z/, /t/, //, //


Eg: caves, lives, robs, reads, comes……


- ES is pronounced /iz/ and /z/ if verbs and nouns end in /s/, /z/, /t/, //,


// sounds


Eg: washes, misses, churches….


<i><b>b, Listen and repeat(page 18)</b></i>


<i><b>c, Practice reading these sentences (page 18)</b></i>
<b>2. Doing exercises (page 18-19)</b>


<i><b>a, Exercise 1 (page 18)</b></i>


<i>Underline the most suitable tense form in each sentence.</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers



1- Have you seen 5- didn’t listen
2- Did you enjoy 6- Have you two met
3- was 7- Did you meet
4- Did you give / saw


<i><b>b, Exercise 2 (page 19)</b></i>


<i>Decide which answer A, B or C best fits each space</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- B 6- B 11- B
2- C 7- B 12- C
3- A 8- C 13- C
4- A 9- B 14- A
5- B 10- C 15- B


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

- Prepare for the next period: Unit 2 – A - Reading


<b>P.D:1.9.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>8: Unit 2: </b>

<b>Cultural diversity</b>




<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 1</b>

<b>: </b>

A - Reading


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Reading a passage about the cultural diversity and doing exercises about it
2. Education: - Knowing more about cultural diversity


3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Integrated, mainly communicative


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>



- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5
- Chatting about sts’ families


- Set the scence


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Exercise 1 (page 18) – 1st


2- Exercise 2 (page 19) – 1st


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- T corrects mistakes
- Sts read through the
passage then find out new
words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


<b>1. Before you read (page 20)</b>


<i>* Discuss the question: Which of the following factors is the most </i>
<i>important for a happy life? Why?</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


1- love 2- a good job 3- good health


<i>* Presenting the new words</i>


- to confide (v) : chia sẻ, tâm sù



- sacrifice (v) hy sinh


- contractual marriage (n) hôn nhân do cha mẹ xếp đặt


- to determine (v) xác định, quyết định


- unwise (a) ngu xuÈn, d¹i


- to reject (v) loại bỏ, không chấp nhận


- to oblige (v) bắt buộc


- romantic (a) l·ng m¹n
<b>2. While you read (page 22)</b>
<i><b>a. Task 1(page 22)</b></i>


<i>Explain the meaning of the italicized words/ phrases in the following </i>
<i>sentences</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- happen or exist before


2- find out


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task 2
- Sts work in pairs


- Sts answer the questions


- Sts goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts work in groups
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


4- willingly stop having st you want
5- having a duty to do st


<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 22)</b></i>


<i>Answer the following questions</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers


1- They are physical attractiveness, confiding, partnership of equals, trust
built on love.


2- The young Americans are much more concerned than the young
Indians and the Chinese with physical attractiveness when choosing a
wife or a husband.


3- The Indian students agree that a woman has to sacrifice more in a


marriage than a man.


4- The American wife trusts her husband to do the right thing because he
loves her not because he has to.


5- The main finding of the survey is that young Asians are not romantic
as their American counterparts.


<b>3. After you read (page 22)</b>


<i>Discuss the question</i>


- Feedback and suggest
1- number of children


2- the house they like to have
3- the head of the family
4- who works


5- who takes care of the housework and children
6- the income


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice reading at home
- Redo excercises at home



- Do exercise part: Reading in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 2 – B- Speaking


<b>P.D:2.9.2010</b><i> </i>

<b>§</b>

<b>9: Unit 2: </b>

<b>Cultural diversity</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 2</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>b - speaking</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Speaking about the similarities and differences of the culture between Vietnam and
America


- Expressing opinion


2. Education: - Knowing much more about the cultural diversity



- Comparing about the culture between Vietnam and America
3. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Integrated, mainly communicative
- Pair, group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1st<sub>)</sub>


2- Read the passage then do task 1 (1st<sub>)</sub>


3- Read the passage then do task 2 (1st<sub>)</sub>


III. New lesson




<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T gives new words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- T reads and explain the
examples


- Sts work in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk aloud
about their answers.
- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2
- T explains task 2
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task 3
- T explains the examples
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps



<b>1. Task 1(page 22)</b>


<i>Express your point of view on the following ideas, using the words or </i>
<i>expressions in the box.</i>


* Presenting new words
- to precede (v) ®i tríc


- nursing home (n) bệnh xá, trại dỡng lÃo


* Explaining expressions given in textbook


Agree disagree


-I think/ feel/ believe ….. - I don’t agree ……..
- In my opinion, ……. – It’s not true ……….
- For me …….. – That’s wrong …….
* Feedback and give suggested answers


1- I think a happy marriage should be based on love.


2- For me, I don’t agree that love is supposed to follow marriage not
precede it.


3- I don’t agree with the idea that a man and a woman may hold hands
and kiss each other in public.


<b>2. Task 2 (page 22)</b>



<i>Below are some typical features of American culture. Discuss and find </i>
<i>out the corresponding features of Vietnamese culture.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


<b>In america in vietnam</b>


1- Two generations (parents and 1- Three or sometimes four
children) live in a home. generations under one roof


2- Old-aged parents live in 2- Elders live with children and are
nursing homes taken care of by their son.


3- It is not polite to ask questions 3- Asking about age, marriage and
about age, marriage and income income is acceptable


4- Americans can greet anyone 4- A Vietnamese greets the head of
in the family first. the family or an elder person first
5- Groceries are bought once a 5- Groceries are bought every day
week


6- Christmas and New Year 6- Tet (Lunar New Year) is the
holidays are the most important most important.


7- Children sleep in their own 7- Children often sleep with their
room parents


<b>3. Task 3 (page 24)</b>


<i>Talk about the similarities and differences between Vietnamese and </i>


<i>American cultures, using the features discussed in task 2</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


home. In Vietnam, two, three or even four generations live under one
roof……..


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice speaking at home


- Do exercise part: Speaking in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 2 – C- Listening


<b>P.D:2.9.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>10: Unit 2: </b>

<b>Cultural diversity</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 3</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>C- listening</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Listening to a conversation between tourists and a tourist guide about a wedding
ceremony and doing tasks.


2. Education: - Knowing much more about the cultural diversity
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Integrated, mainly communicative.


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan



<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Task 2 (page 23) 1st


2- Task 3 (page 24) 1st


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- T gives new words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words



- Sts pronounce after T


<b>1. Before you listen (page 24)</b>


<i>* Discuss the following questions</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers
1- Yes, I have


2- The bride and the groom usually stand in front of the altar praying and
asking their ancestor’s permission to be married. They exchange their
wedding rings.


<i>* Presenting new words</i>


- altar (n) bµn thê


- Master of ceremony (n) chđ h«n


- banquet (n) tiƯc cới


- ancestor (n) tổ tiên


- tray (n) cái khay


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

- Sts study task 1 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice



- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully
- T explains task 2


- Listen to the disk twice
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
- T explains the task
- Sts work in groups
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


<i>* Listen and repeat</i>


<b>2. While you listen (page 16-17)</b>
<i><b>a. Task 1(page 25)</b></i>



<i>Listen to the passage and fill in the missing information.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- groom’s parents 4- at the wedding banquet
2- red paper 5- wedding cards/ money
3- altar


<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 25)</b></i>


<i>Listen again and answer the questions</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers


1- The most important thing the groom’s family has to do on the wedding
day is to go to the bride’s house bringing gifts wrapped in the red paper.
2- They would pray and ask their ancestor’s permission to get married.
3- After they pray and ask their ancestor’s permission to get married.
4- The wedding banquet is usually held at the groom’s and bride’s home
or at a hotel or a restaurant.


5- They stop by each table to thank their guests.


<b>3. After you listen (page 25)</b>


<i>Discuss the question: What do families often do to prepare for a wedding</i>
<i>ceremony?</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers



<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice listening at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 2 – D – Writing


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>9.9.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>11: Unit 2: </b>

<b>Cultural diversity</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 4</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>d - writing</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Writing a passage about 150 words about the conical leaf hat or the “nón lá” a symbol


of Vietnamese culture.


2. Education: - Knowing much more about the cultural diversity.
3. Skills: - practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Integrated, mainly communicative
- Individual and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Do AFTER YOU LISTEN (page 25) (1st)
2- Talk about a wedding ceremony. (1st<sub>)</sub>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>



- Sts study the task 1 and
find out any new words
-T explains the meaning
- Sts pronounce after T


- Sts study task 2
- T explains task 2
- Sts work in groups to
answer the questions given
by teacher.


- Sts write individually
- T calls sts to talk about
their writing.


- T corrects mistakes
- T collects some writings


<b>1. Task 1(page 25)</b>


<i>Write Vietnamese equivalents for the English words.</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers


1- leaf :l¸ 3- ribs: vanh nãn


2- rim: vµnh nãn 4- strap: quai nãn


* Some useful language



- conical leaf hat: nãn l¸ - conical form: h×nh chãp


- spirit : tinh thần - diameter: đường kính
- palm: c©y cä


<b>2. Task 2 (page 26)</b>


<i>Write a passage about 150 words about the conical leaf hat of Vietnam.</i>


* Suggestions: Answer these questions


1- Why is the conical leaf hat one of the typical symbols of the


Vietnamese culture? – (Because it cannot be found any where else in the
world.)


2- What is it made from? – (It is made from a special kind of bamboo,
young and soft palm leaves.)


3- How shape is it? – (It has a conical form.)


4- What about the diameter? – (It is from 45 to 50 cm.)
5- How high is it? – (It is from 25 to 30 cm high.)


6- What is the process of making a conical leaf hat? – (The form is
covered with the palm leaves, the hat is trimmed and painted with a coat
of attar oil before sewing leaves around ribs.)


7- How is it used? – (It is used like an umbrella to protect people from


the sun and the rain.)


8- How do girls and women look under the broad rims of the leaf hat?
– (They look much more beautiful and attractive.)


* Feedback and give a suggested writing.


The conical leaf hat is one of the typical features of the Vietnamese
culture because it cannot be found in any where else in the world. The
conical leaf hat is not only a symbol of Vietnamese girls (women) but
also has become part of the spirit of Vietnamese nation.


The hat is made from a special kind of bamboo, young and soft palm
leaves. It has a conical form. The diameter of the hat is from 45 to 50 cm
and it is from 25 to 30 cm high. The form is covered with the palm leaves
and leaves are sewed around ribs. Finally the hat is trimmed and painted
with a coat of attar oil.


The leaf hat is used as an umbrella to protect people from the sun or the
rain. Under the broad rims of the leaf hat, the girls and women look much
more beautiful and attractive.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice writing at home



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

- Prepare for the next period: Unit 2 – E – Language focus


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>10.9.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>12: Unit 2: </b>

<b>Cultural diversity</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 5</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>E - language focus</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Pronunciation: The ending “ED”


- Grammar: Tense revision: The present simple and present progressive.
2. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Individual, pair and the whole class work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>


<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Read the writing at home. (2 sts)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T pronounces the sounds
as a model


- T explains the sounds
- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts practice


- Sts study exercise 1
- T explains the main points
- Sts work in pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study exercise 2
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about


<b>1. Pronunciation(page 27) : -ed endings</b>
<i><b>a, Notes </b></i>


- ED is pronounced /t/ if verbs end in these consonant sounds: /k/, /p/,
/f/, /s/, / t/, //and //


Eg: stopped, laughed, cooked, bathed, missed, watched, washed…
- ED is pronounced /Id/ if verbs consonants sounds: /t/, /d/


Eg: wanted, needed, arrested, decided…


- Ed is pronounced /d/ if verbs end in vowel sounds and the rest of the
consonant sounds:


Eg: played, lived, phoned…


<i><b>b, Listen and repeat(page 27)</b></i>


<i><b>c, Practice reading these sentences (page 27)</b></i>
<b>2. Doing exercises (page 27-28)</b>


<i><b>a, Exercise 1 (page 27-28)</b></i>


<i>Complete the following conversations with the correct form of the verbs </i>
<i>in the box.</i>



- Feedback and give correct answers
1- Have … seen/ saw/ am going to see
2- drank/ haven’t drunk/ drank


3- has written/ Did …write/ wrote
4- have been cooking/ cooked/ cooked


<i><b>b, Exercise 2 (page 28)</b></i>


<i>Circle the letter (A, B, C or D) to complete the passage.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study exercise 3
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


5- C 6- A 7- C 8- A


<i><b>c, Exercise 3 (page 28)</b></i>


<i>Complete the following letter with the correct form of the verbs in </i>
<i>brackets</i>



- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- moved 5- study
2- moved 6- will fail
3- have asked 7- could talk
4- haven’t stopped


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home


- Do exercises in workbook – part: Language focus
- Prepare for the next period: Unit 3 – A- Reading


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>15.9.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>13: Unit 3: </b>

<b>ways of socialising</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 1</b>

<b>: </b>

A - Reading


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: Reading a passage about ways of socialising and doing exercises about it.
2. Education: Knowing more about ways of socialising.



3. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5
- Set the scence


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Exercise 1 (page 27) – 1st


2- Exercise 3 (page 28) – 1st



<i><b>III. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Before you read (page 30)</b>


<i>* Discuss the questions and describe the pictures</i>


1- Picture 1: Two men are holding their hands.


- Picture 2: They are waving their hands to say goodbye their friends.
2- If you want to get your teacher’s attention in class, raise your hand.
- If you need to ask someone a question, but they are busy talking to
someone else, you will raise your hand.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

- Sts read through the
passage then find out new
words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T



- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task 2


- Sts work in the whole class
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 3
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



<i>* Presenting the new words</i>


- verbal communication(n): giao tiÕp b»ng lêi


- non- verbal communication(n): giao tiÕp phi ng«n ngữ


- obvious(a): rõ ràng


- appropriate to/ for (a): thích hợp


- to nod(n): gật đầu


- to whistle(v): huýt sáo


- to clap(v): vỗ tay


- to point at(v): chỉ tay
<b>2. While you read (page 32)</b>
<i><b>a. Task 1(page 32)</b></i>


<i>Give the Vietnamese equivalents to the following words and phrases.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- verbal: b»ng lêi


2- non-verbal: kh«ng b»ng lêi


3- attract someone’s attention: thu hút sự chú ý của ai đó



4- impolite: kh«ng lịch sự


5- rude: thô tục, thô bạo


6- informality: thân mật


7- approach: tiÕp cËn


8- a slight nod will do: cái gật đầu là đủ
<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 32)</b></i>


<i>Decide which of the three options below is the best title for the passage.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers


A: Attracting attention : Non-verbal communication


<i><b>c. Task 3 (page 32)</b></i>


<i>Answer the following questions</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers


1- We can use either verbal or non-verbal communication.
2- They are strong actions that can easily be seen.


3- We can wait until he passes near us, catch his eyes, and nod slightly to
let him know we would like him to come to our table. Or we can raise our
hand slightly to show that we need assistance.



4- You can use a small friendly wave to attract his or her attention.
5- Because pointing at someone is usually considered rude.


<b>3. After you read (page 32)</b>


<i>Discuss the meanings of whistling and hand-clapping in Vietnamese </i>
<i>culture.</i>


- Feedback
……….


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice reading at home
- Redo excercises at home


- Do exercise part: Reading in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 3 – B- Speaking


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 2</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>b - speaking</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>


<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Speaking about giving compliments and responding to the compliments in different
Situations.


2. Education: - Knowing how to give compliments and respond to the compliments.


- Comparing about the culture between Vietnam and America
3. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Pair, group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>


<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1st<sub>)</sub>


2- Read the passage then do task 1 (1st<sub>)</sub>


3- Read the passage then do task 3 (1st<sub>)</sub>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T gives new words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- T reads and explain the
examples



- Sts practice reading in
pairs


- T calls sts to read.
- Sts study task 2
- T explains task 2
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Task 1(page 32)</b>


<i>Practice reading these dialogues, paying attention to how people give </i>
<i>and respond to compliments in each situation.</i>


* Presenting new words
- compliment(n): lêi khen


- hairstyle(n): kiểu tóc


- terrific(a): xuất sắc


- decent(a): lịch sự


- kidding(a): đùa


* Feedback and give suggested compliment ways:
- What a/ an ………….!



- How + adj ………!


- Superlative + S + have/ has + ever + Vp2
= S + have/ has + never + Vp2 + comparative
Eg: - What a beautiful skirt!


= How beautiful your skirt is!


= That is the most beautiful skirt I have ever seen.
= I have never seen a more beautiful skirt than that.


<b>2. Task 2 (page 33)</b>


<i>Practice giving compliments to suit the responses. Use the cues below.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


David: What a beautiful dress you are wearing, Kathy!
Hung: You have a decent motorbike, Hien!


Michael: You played badminton very well, today!


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

- Sts study task 3
- T explains task 3
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task 4
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<i>Practice responding to the compliments below</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


You: Thanks, Phil. I think that’s because I have practiced a lot with the
help of dancing teacher.


You: I’m glad you like listening to me playing the guitar, Peter.
You: That’s kind of you to say so, Tom. Actually, my English is
influenced by an American teacher.


<b>4. Task 4 (page 33)</b>


<i>Make dialogues to practice giving and responding to compliments, using </i>
<i>the cues below.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


1- Minh: The pair of glasses you are wearing are so nice.
An: Thanks. My friend gave them to me on my birthday.
2- Huy: What a new and expensive watch you have.



Linh: I’m glad you like it. I bought it yesterday.
………..


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice speaking at home


- Do exercise part: Speaking in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 3 – C- Listening


<b>P.D: 20.9.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>15: Unit 3: </b>

<b>ways of socialising</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 3</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>C- listening</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>


<i><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: Listening to a talk about young people on how to use the telephone in their family and
doing tasks given.


2. Education: - Knowing how to use the telephone politely.
3. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5



<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>(15 minute test)
- Give topics to sts.


- Mark levels and answer keys
+ Topic 1: Question 1: 1- T
2- T
3- F


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

2- Americans.
+ Topic 2: Question 1: 1- T


2- F
3- T


Question 2: 1- Smoking


2- You will be asked to provide identification.


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes



- T gives new words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2 carefully
- T explains task 2


- Listen to the disk twice
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
- T explains the task


- Sts work in groups
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


<b>1. Before you listen (page 34)</b>


<i>* Answer the following questions</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


1- They are talking to each other on the phone.
2- They would say “Hello”.


3- They may talk about their friends…
4- About 10 to 15 minutes.


<i>* Presenting new words</i>


- marvellous (a): tuyÖt vêi


- regulation (n): néi quy


- installed (a): lp t


- startling (a): làm giật mình


- argument (n): sù c·i nhau



- apoplectic (a): làm đỏ mặt


- shank (n): thêi gian thó vÞ nhÊt
<i>* Listen and repeat</i>


<b>2. While you listen (page 35)</b>
<i><b>a. Task 1(page 35)</b></i>


<i>linda Cupple, a social worker, advises young people on how to use the </i>
<i>telephone in their family. Listen to her talk and decide whether the </i>
<i>statements are true (T) or false (F).</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- T


2- F
3- T
4- F
5- F
6- T


<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 35)</b></i>


<i>Listen to part of Ms Linda Cupple’s talk again and write the missing </i>
<i>words.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers
1- agreed 5- walking
2- to avoid 6- heart


3- particular 7- kindness
4- adults 8- to stick


<b>3. After you listen (page 36)</b>


<i>Summarize Ms Linda Cupple’s talk</i>


- Feedback and give the suggestions
+ length of time for each call


+ Time for calling
+ Calling late at night.
+ Calling at weekends


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

<i>advice on how to use the telephone in the family. The first is to work out </i>
<i>a reasonable…</i>


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice listening at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 3 – D – Writing


<b>P.D:</b> <i><b>22.09.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>16: Unit 3: </b>

<b>ways of socialising</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 4</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>d - writing</b>




<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Writing a passage by using the words given to make sentences and reordering
paragraphs.


2. Education: - Knowing much more about how to write a passage.
3. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Individual and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks


- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Do AFTER YOU LISTEN (page 25) (1st)
2- New words (1st<sub>)</sub>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task 1


-T explains the requirements
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls on sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes



- Sts study task 2
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about


<b>1. Task 1(page 36)</b>


<i>Use the words to make sentences. Change the form of the verb. (No </i>
<i>addition or omission is required)</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers


1- There are many ways to tell someone goodbye, and most of them
depend on the situation at hand.


2- However, there is one rule that all situations observe: We seldom say
goodbye abruptly.


3- In English it is necessary to prepare a person for our departure.


4- We lead into the farewell by saying something pleasant and thoughtful
like: “I’ve really enjoyed talking to you.”


5- We might also say something relating to the time like: “Gosh, I can’t
believe how late it is! I really must be going!”


<b>2. Task 2 (page 36)</b>


<i>Put the sentences of the two paragraphs below in their right order. Write </i>


<i>the re-ordered paragraphs in the space provided.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts read the paragraphs


+ Paragraph 1: 1- C 3- A 5- D
2- E 4- B


+ Paragraph 1: 1- C 3- B 5- D
2- E 4- A


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice writing at home


- Do exercise part: Writing in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 3 – E – Language focus


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>24.09.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>17: Unit 3: </b>

<b>ways of socialising</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 5</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>E </b>

<b> language focus</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Pronunciation: Stress in two-syllable words
- Grammar: Reported speech


2. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Individual, pair and the whole class work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan



<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Task 1 (page 36) – (2sts)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T pronounces as a model
- T explains the stress
- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts practice


- Sts study exercise 1


<b>1. Pronunciation(page 38) : Stress in two-syllable words</b>
<i><b>a, Notes </b></i>


- Most verbs and adverbs have two syllables – stress falls in the second
syllable especially the syllable with long and double vowels except //



Eg: escape, forget, enjoy, abroad, …..


- Most nouns and adjectives have two syllables – stress falls in the first
syllable especially the syllable with long and double vowels except //


Eg: student, paper, answer, boring, pleasant, handsome ….


<i><b>b, Listen and repeat(page 27)</b></i>


<i><b>c, Practice reading these sentences (page 27)</b></i>
<b>2. Doing exercises (page 27-28)</b>


<i><b>a, Exercise 1 (page 27-28)</b></i>


<i>Last week you met Thuan, a friend you hadn’t seen for a long time. Look </i>
<i>at the list of things he said to you then tell another friend what he said. </i>
<i>Use reported speech.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

- T explains the main points
and review the reported
speech.


- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes



- Sts study exercise 2
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


1- Thuan said he was going to work in HCM city the next July.
2- Thuan said he worked for a big company.


3- Thuan said he was their marketing manager.


4- Thuan said the company had opened an office in HCM city.
5- Thuan said it had been very successful.


6- Thuan said he had been chosen to run an office in District 5.
7- Thuan asked me how long I had been learning English.
8- Thuan said he didn’t have much time to enjoy himself.
9- Thuan hoped I would come and visit him in HCM city.
10- Thuan hoped he would be successful in HCM city.


<i><b>b, Exercise 2 (page 39)</b></i>


<i>Lan was angry with Tung. Tuan tried to help them get back together, and</i>
<i>talked to Lan for Tung. Read the dialogue and complete the conversation</i>
<i>Tuan had with Tung.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
2- was upset



3- was not interested


4- had promised to go to the cinema
5- hadn’t turned up


6- didn’t want to see you


7- she didn’t believe you had tried
8- she would talk to you later


9- she had to go otherwise she would be late for school.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home


- Do exercises in workbook – part: Language focus
- Prepare for the next period


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>02.10.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>18: </b>

<b>test yourself A</b>



<b>T.D: </b>
<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


- Sts check themselves the knowledge of English they have learnt in the last three units and prepare for
the one period test.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Testing


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting



- Checking the attendance:


12A3 12A4 12A5
- Set the scence


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task


- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts do the task individually
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


T- Sts study the task
carefully


- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts work individually
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T collects and corrects
some writings


<b>1. Listening (page 41) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i>Listen to the passage about the changes in families in Western countries </i>
<i>during the last two centuries and decide if the following statements are </i>
<i>true (T) or false (F)</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- T 4- T
2- F 5- T


3- F


<b>2. Reading (page 41) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i>Read the passage and then answer the questions</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- We can communicate not only through words but also through body
language.


2. They are our posture, facial expressions and gestures.


3. If your posture is slumped and your head is down, this could mean that
that you are sad or lack confidence.


4- A person who doesn’t look away is expressing a challenge. A person
who doesn’t look at you is expressing lack of interest or is shy.


5- Because that person might be angry at you or feel superior to you.


<b>3. Grammar (page 42) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i><b>a, Circle the correct answer (A, B, C or D) to complete the letter. </b></i>
<i><b>(1.5 points)</b></i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- C 2- D 3- B
4- A 5- B 6- D



<i><b>b, Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it has the </b></i>
<i><b>same meaning as the original sentence. (1 point)</b></i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- Lan asked John what he had done before working for that company.
2- Bill promised to come to see me the next Sunday.


3- John apologized for not ringing me earlier.


4- Miss White thanked Peter for giving her the present.


<b>4. Writing (page 43) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i>Write a letter of about 150 words to your pen pal, telling him/ her about </i>
<i>your family. Use the guidelines below.</i>


* Suggestions


- Give the number of your family members, their names, ages and jobs.
- How do they share the housework?


- How do they behave?
- What are their hobbies?


- What do they like about each of them?
- Your family rules ………..


* Mark levels


- Structures: 1 point
- Content: 0.5 point
- Vocabulary: 1 point


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

- Prepare for the one period test.


<b>P.D: 09.10.2009</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>19: </b>

<b>The one period test</b>



<b>T.D</b>
<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>



<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


-Check sts’ knowledge of English from unit 1 to unit 3.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


-


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: pens


- Teacher: English paper test, topics and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T gives sts requirements


- T gives sts test papers
- Sts do the test individually
- T collect test papers.


<b>1. Topics: - </b>4 topics<i>(handouts)<b> </b></i>
<b>2. Mark levels and answer keys.</b>
<i><b>a,Topic 01</b></i>


<i>I. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. D 2. D 3. A 4. A 5. A 6. C


<i>II. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. D 2. A 3. A 4. A 5. B
6. D 7. C 8. A 9. C 10. A


<i>III. 0.5 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. The telephone is a marvelous instrument.
2. It must be worked out with your parents.


3. Because your parents or someone else may be trying to reach your
home for a very important reason.


4. Try to stick your family’s regulations.


5. The shock of waking out of a sound sleep and the fright of that instant
thought – “There’s an accident” – are enough to give your parents a heart
attack.



<i>IV. 0.5 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. My responsibility in the family is to wash the dishes.
2. A happy marriage should be based on love.


3. There are many ways to tell someone goodbye, most of them depend
on the situations and at hand


4. The conical leaf hat is a symbol of Vietnamese people.


<i>V. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. were going 2. get – have 3. haven’t seen
4. built 5. will do


<i><b>b,Topic 02</b></i>


<i>I. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

<i>II. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. A 2. D 3. D 4. A 5. A
6. A 7. A 8. D 9. C 10. D


<i>III. 0.5 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. The telephone is a marvelous instrument.


2. A serious problem is calling very late at night, or very early in the


morning.


3. Tell your friends to avoid calling at that hour.
4. Because a lot of tired adults are happily sleeping.


5.Ask him to call back or offer to call him when dinner is over.


<i>IV. 0.5 point for each correct answer.</i>


01. I often share my personal secrets with my parents.


02. I always talk to my parents before making an important decision.
03. In Vietnam, three or even four generations live in a home.


04. The conical leaf hat is used to protect people from the sun or the rain.


<i>V. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. drives 2. hasn’t visited 3. were playing
4. worked 5. had done 6. will finish


<i><b>c,Topic 03</b></i>


<i>I. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. A 2. C 3. B 4. D 5. C 6. A


<i>II. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. D 2. D 3. A 4. D 5. A


6. AB 7. B 8. C 9. A 10. D


<i>(Part III , IV , V are the same as topic 1)</i>


<i><b>d,Topic 04</b></i>


<i>I. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. B 2. B 3. C 4. B 5. C 6. A


<i>II. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. C 2. C 3. A 4. A 5. B
6. A 7. A 8. D 9. B 10. D


<i>(Part III , IV , V are the same as topic 2)</i>


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo the test at home


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>10.10.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>20: </b>

<b>paying back the one period test</b>



<b>T.D</b>
<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


- Paying English papers back to sts.


- Correcting common mistakes and giving remarks on the test so that sts can do the other test better.
- Giving answer keys.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


-


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: pens


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>


<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the test


- Sts compare with a partner
- T gives remarks on the test
- T gives answer keys
- T corrects common
mistakes


1- Paying back the English papers
2- Giving remarks on the test.


- Students: lazy and lack of knowledge
- Best part:


- Worst part :
- Best work:
- Worst work:



3- Correct common mistakes
-


-
-




<i><b>-IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo the test at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 4- A Reading


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>11.10.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>21: Unit 4: </b>

<b>school education system</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 1</b>

<b>: </b>

A - Reading


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: Reading a passage about school education system in England and doing exercise .
2. Education: Comparing with school education system in Viet Nam.


3. Skills: Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>



- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6
- Set the scence


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts read through the
passage then find out new
words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about


their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


<b>1. Before you read (page 44)</b>


<i>* Read the facts below and decide whether the statements about schools </i>
<i>in Viet Nam are true(T) or false (F)</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


1- T 3- T 5- T
2- F 4- F



<i>* Presenting the new words</i>


- compulsory (a): b¾t buéc


- academic year (n): năm học


- parallel (a): song song, tng ng


- category (n)


- curriculum (n): chơng trình môn học
<b>2. While you read (page 46)</b>


<i><b>a. Task 1(page 46)</b></i>


<i>Find words or phrases in the reading passage which have the following </i>
<i>meaning.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- state school 2- primary education
3- secondary education 4- compulsory


5- The general certificate of secondary school (GCSE)
6- curriculum


<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 46)</b></i>


<i>Answer the following questions</i>



- Feedback and give the suggested answers
1- From the age of five.


2- 3 terms.


3- The state school and the “independent” or “public” school systems.
4- Yes, they do.


5- There are 3 core subjects: (English, Math and science.)


6- When the students finish the secondary school, they can take an
examination called The General Certificate of Secondary Education
(GCSE).


<b>3. After you read (page 46)</b>


<i>Tell the others one of the most difficult school subjects you are studying </i>
<i>and what you would like your friends and your teacher to do to help you </i>
<i>learn that subject more effectively.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


Eg: I find history very difficult. It is too long to remember all the
historical events. I would learn it better if the teacher could help with a
short description of each event.


………….


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>



- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice reading at home
- Redo exercise at home


- Do exercise part: Reading in workbook


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

<b>P.D: 12.10.2009</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>22: Unit 4: </b>

<b>school education system</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 2</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>b - speaking</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Talking about the school education system in Vietnam. ,.


2. Education: - Knowing how to give compliments and respond to the compliments.


- Comparing about the culture between Vietnam and America
3. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>



- Presentation and practice
- Pair, group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1st<sub>)</sub>


2- Read the passage then do task 2 (1st<sub>)</sub>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T gives new words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words



- Sts pronounce after T
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- T reads and explain the
examples


- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2
- T explains task 2
- Sts work in groups
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


<b>1. Task 1(page 47)</b>


<i>Study the table below and then ask and answer the questions about the </i>
<i>school education system in Vietnam.</i>


* Presenting new words
- nursery


- kindergarten
- optional


* Feedback and give suggested answer:



1- A: When do the children in Vietnam go to nursery?
B: When they are 3 years old.


A: How long does the nursery education last?
B: 2 years


2- A: When do the children in Viet Nam go to kindergarten?
B: At the age of 4.


A: How long does the kindergarten last?
B: 2 years


………


<b>2. Task 2 (page 47)</b>


<i>Talk about the school education system in Vietnam, using the information</i>
<i>from Task 1.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers
1- Pre-school


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task 3
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- T corrects mistakes


This stage of study for the children aged from 6 to 10 years old. I t
includes grades from 1 to 5. It is compulsory for all children.
3- Secondary education


This stage lasts 7 years and it is divided into two levels: lower secondary
school (from grade 6 to 9) and upper secondary school (from grade 10 to
12). The lower secondary education is compulsory. The children have no
examinations when they finish this stage of study. The upper secondary
education is not compulsory and the children have to take an entrance
examination. When finish it, they will have to take a general certificate of
secondary education.(GCSE)


<b>3. Task 3 (page 47)</b>


<i>Talk about the similarities and differences between the school system in </i>
<i>Vietnam and in England.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


There are several similarities and differences between he school system
in Vietnam and in England. The children in England start school at the
age of 5 but those in Vietnam start school at the age of 6 ……


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points



<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice speaking at home


- Do exercise part: Speaking in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 4 – C- Listening


<b>P.D: 12.10.2009</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>23: Unit 4: </b>

<b>school education system</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 3</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>C- listening</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: Listening to a conversation about the school days and doing tasks given.
2. Education: Comparing with the school days of the children in Vietnam.


3. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work



<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Talk about the school education system in Vietnam. (1 st)
2- Compare with the school education system in England. (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs


<b>1. Before you listen (page 48)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- T corrects mistakes
- T gives new words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2 carefully
- T explains task 2


- Listen to the disk twice
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task


- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Feedback and give suggested answers
1- I am good at math.


2- I enjoy physics most in my class because I find it very interesting.


<i>* Presenting new words</i>


- tear away (v): chạy vụt đi, lao đi


- disruptive(a): đập vỡ, phá vỡ


- methodical (a): có phơng ph¸p


- actually (adv): thùc tÕ


- struggle (n): cuộc đấu tranh
<i>* Listen and repeat</i>


<b>2. While you listen (page 48)</b>
<i><b>a. Task 1(page 48)</b></i>


<i>Listen to the conversation between Jenny and Gavin. Put a tick (V) to the</i>
<i>question to which the answer is “yes”.</i>



- Feedback and give the correct answers


<b> Jenny - gavin</b>


1- “Did you always work very hard?” <i>V V</i>


2- “Did you always listen carefully to your teachers?” <i>V</i>


3- “Did you always behave well?” <i>V</i>


4- “Did you pass your exams easily?”


5- “Did you always write your homework slowly <i>V V</i>


and carefully?”


6- “Did you think school days are/ were the best days
of your life?”


<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 48)</b></i>


<i>Listen again and answer the questions</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers
1- When he enjoyed the subjects.


2- He found it very difficult.


3- Because they were difficult for him to do in a short time.



4- Because he went away to boarding school when he was quite young
and he didn’t like that. So school days weren’t the best days of his life.


<b>3. After you listen (page 48)</b>


<i>Talk about the results of your current exams at school and what you will </i>
<i>do to prepare for the next exams.</i>


- Feedback
………..


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice listening at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 4 – D – Writing


<b>P.D: </b><i><b>14.10.2009</b></i><b> </b>

<b>§24: Unit 4: school education system</b>


<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 4</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>d - writing</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

Vietnam, using the information given in Speaking tasks at page 47.


2. Education: - Knowing much more about the formal school education system in Vietnam.
3. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Individual and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>



- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Task 2 (page 48) (1 st)


2- Do AFTER YOU LISTEN (page 48) (1st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the requirements
-T explains the requirements
- Sts work in groups


- Sts discuss the questions
- T goes around and helps
- T calls on sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- T corrects mistakes


- Sts work individually to
write based on the guide line
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to write their
writing on the green board
- T corrects mistakes
- T collects some writings


<i>In about 150 words, write a paragraph on the formal school education </i>
<i>system in Vietnam, using the information given in Speaking Tasks on </i>
<i>page 47. You may follow the suggestions below:</i>


<b>1. Guide to write</b>


<i>* Giving suggested questions</i>


1- How many levels of education are there in our school education
system?


2- How long does it take to complete each level?
3- How many classes are there in each level?
4- When do children start grade 1?


<i>* Giving the main ideas</i>


1- Levels of education:- Primary (5 years; start from the age of 6)
- Lower secondary (4 years)



- Upper secondary (3years)


2- Compulsory education: 9 years (primary and lower secondary)
3- The academic year: 35 weeks (9 months, from September to May)
4- School terms: 2 terms: term (Sep – Dec) , term 2 (Jan – May)
5- Time of the national examination for GCSE (early June)


<b>2. Writing</b>


- Feedback and give a suggested writing


The formal school education system in Vietnam consists of two levels of
education: Primary and secondary. The children start grade 1 at the age of
6 and the normally complete the primary education at the age of 10..
They move to lower secondary school to study in grade 6 when they are
11. They will finish nine year compulsory education when they complete
grade 9 at the age of 14. The children may go to upper secondary school
if they pass the grade 10 entrance examination. They will stay there until
they complete grade 12 at the age of 17. If they want to sit for the
entrance exams to universities or colleges they will have to pass the
national examination for GCSE which takes place at the end of May or
the beginning of June. The academic year in Vietnam runs from


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

long summer holiday comes.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points



<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice writing at home


- Do exercise part: Writing in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 4 – E – Language focus


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>15.10.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>25: Unit 4: </b>

<b>school education system</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 5</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>E </b>

<b> language focus</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>



1. Knowledge: - Pronunciation: Stress in three-syllable words
- Grammar: Passive voice


2. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Individual, pair and the whole class work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Read your writing at home (1 st)


III. New lesson




<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T pronounces as a model
- T explains the stress
- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts practice


- Sts study exercise 1


- T explains the main points
and review the passive voice
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Pronunciation(page 49) : Stress in three-syllable words</b>
<i><b>a, Notes </b></i>


- Stress on the first syllable when words end in <b>–ary, -ature, -enty, -ity, </b>
<b>-ory….</b>


Eg:

<b>vic</b>

tory


- Stress before: <b>-ance, -ence, -ant, -ent, -ian, -iar, -ior, -ic, -ical, -ious, </b>
<b>-ity, -cial, -cion, -sion, -tion ….</b>



Eg: dis

<b>cus</b>

sion, im

<b>por</b>

tant, em

<b>ploy</b>

ment….


<i><b>b, Listen and repeat(page 27)</b></i>


<i><b>c, Practice reading these sentences (page 27)</b></i>
<b>2. Doing exercises (page 50-51)</b>


<i><b>a, Exercise 1 (page 50)</b></i>


<i>Fill each blank with the simple present passive form of the verbs in </i>
<i>brackets.</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

- Sts study exercise 2
- Sts do exercise
individually


- T goes around and helps
- Sts compare with a
partner


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study exercise 3
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<i><b>b, Exercise 2 (page 50-51)</b></i>


<i>Rewrite the following sentences using the passive voice</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- This school was built in 1997.


2- This dictionary was first published in 1870.


3- A surprised party is going to be organized tomorrow evening by the
students in my class.


4- The kitchen is being painted now.


5- “Romeo and Juliet” was written by Shakespeare in 1605.


6- Shakespears’s tragedies have been translated into many languages.
7- A new primary school has just been built in my village.


8- English will be spoken at the conference.


9- The floor hasn’t been cleaned the floor by Jane yet.
10. The house will be repaired soon.


<i><b>b, Exercise 3 (page 51)</b></i>



<i>Fill in the spaces of the following passage with the correct tense in the </i>
<i>passive voice of the verbs in brackets.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- was built 6- can be used
2- were sold 7- is stored
3- has been made 8- are done
4- can be bought 9- must be told
5- are used 10- can be done


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home


- Do exercises in workbook – part: Language focus
- Prepare for the next period: Unit 5 – A – Reading


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>18.10.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>26: Unit 5: </b>

<b>higher education</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 1</b>

<b>: </b>

A - Reading


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: Reading a passage about three American students’ first impressions of university life,
then doing the tasks that follow.


2. Education: - Comparing with university life in Vietnam.
3. Skills: Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks


- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

12A5 12A6
- Set the scence


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Task 1 (page 50) (1 st)
2- Task 2 (page 50-51) (1 st)
3- Task 3 (page 51) (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts read through the
passage then find out new
words



- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 3
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs


- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about


<b>1. Before you read (page 52)</b>


<i>* Ask and answer the questions</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers
1- Hue University


Ha Noi university of Architecture
Ha Noi university of Natural Science.
2- (free)


<i>* Presenting the new words</i>


- campus (n) khu sân bãi ( trờng đại học)


- to blame (v) đổ lỗi, chịu trách nhiệm


- to daunt (v) làm nản chí


- scary (a) sợ hÃi


- mate (n) bạn bè


- amazing (a) làm ngạc nhiên



- challenge (n) th¸ch thøc
<b>2. While you read (page 53-54)</b>
<i><b>a. Task 1(page 54)</b></i>


<i>Complete the following sentences, using the right forms of the words in </i>
<i>the box.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- campus 3- scariest 5- amazing
2- blamed 4- challenges


<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 54)</b></i>


<i>Find out who</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers


<b>Sarah: </b> 1- a 2- e
<b>Ellen: </b> 3- b 4- c
<b>Brenden: </b>5- d 6- f


<i><b>c. Task 3 (page 54)</b></i>


<i>Answer the following questions</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


1- She went out her new friends, walking around campus.



2- Because at the party everyone was busy playing some games and no
one seemed to notice her.


3- Her roommate left the window when it was cold outside. She went to
bed early. She blamed Ellen for making her sick.


4- Brenden thought the first year college was the best and most
challenging of his life.


5- It provides him plenty of opportunities to meet non-engineering
students as well as other engineers and many of them have become his
best friends.


<b>3. After you read</b>


<i>Talk about your first impressions of the school life</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

their answers ……….


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice reading at home
- Redo excercise at home


- Do exercise part: Reading in workbook



- Prepare for the next period: Unit 5 – B- Speaking


<b>P.D: 19.10.2009</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>27: Unit 5: </b>

<b>higher education</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 2</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>b - speaking</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering the questions about the application process to tertiary study in
Vietnam.


2. Education: - Their attempts to study well to go on university.
3. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Pair, group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>


<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1st<sub>)</sub>


2- Read the passage then do task 3(1st<sub>)</sub>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T gives new words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts work in pairs


<b>1. Task 1(page 55)</b>


<i>Below are the admission requirements for tertiary institutions in some </i>


<i>countries. Tick (V) those which are obligatory for you to be admitted to a</i>
<i>university in Vietnam.</i>


* Presenting new words
- tertiary (a) thø ba


- an application form (n) đơn xin học


- an identity card (n) giÊy chøng minh nh©n d©n


- a reference letter (n) th giíi thiƯu


- a copy of the originals of your school certificate (n) b¶n sao b»ng gèc


- a birth of certificate (n) giÊy khai sinh


- a copy of the record of your performance at school (n) bản sao học bạ


- scores of the required entrance examination (n) điểm kì thi tun sinh
b¾t buéc


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2
- T explains task 2
- Sts work in pairs
- T goes around and help


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task 3
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


1- an application form
2- an identity card


3- a copy of the originals of your school certificate
4- a birth certificate


5- a copy of the record of your performance at school
6- scores of the required entrance examination


<b>2. Task 2 (page 55)</b>


<i>Ask and answer the questions about the application process to tertiary </i>
<i>study in Vietnam using the following cues.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers
A: When do you fill in the application form?
B: In March.



A: When do you send the application form?
B: In March.


A: When do you take the GCSE examination?
B: In May


A: When do you get the GCSE examination results?
B: In June


A: When do you take the entrance examination?
B: In July


A: When do you get the entrance examination results?
B: In August


A: When do you get a letter of acceptance from the university?
B: Late August or early September.


<b>3. Task 3 (page 56)</b>


<i>Discuss the process of applying to a tertiary institution in Vietnam.</i>


- Feedback
………….


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points



<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice speaking at home


- Do exercise part: Speaking in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 5 – C- Listening


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>20.10.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>28: Unit 5: </b>

<b>higher education</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 3</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>C- listening</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>



1. Knowledge: Listening to a conversation and doing tasks given.
2. Education: Comparing with your schooling.


3. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b>(15 minute test)</i>


1- Giving topics (handouts)
2- Answer keys and mark levels


* Mark levels: <i>1 point for each correct answer</i>



* Answer keys


A, Topic 1:



1. A 2. C 3. A 4. C 5. A 6. C 7. D 8. A 9. C 10. A


B, Topic 2:



1. D 2. C 3. D 4. D 5. A 6. C 7. A 8. D 9. B 10. C


C, Topic 3:



1. C 2. B 3. D 4. B 5. B 6. B 7. B 8. B 9. A 10. D
D, Topic 4:


1. B 2. C 3. D 4. C 5. D 6. A 7. A 8. A 9. A 10. C


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- T gives new words


- T gives the meaning of the


new words


- Sts pronounce after T
- Sts study the task carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice to get the
main ideas


- The whole class listen to
the disk three times to do
the task


- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task carefully
- Sts work in pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Before you listen (page 56)</b>



<i>* Talk about the problems you may have when studying in a new school.</i>


- Feedback
…….


<i>* Presenting new words</i>


- proportion (n) sự cân đối


- tutorial (a) gia s


- rural
- extension
- overseas student


<i>* Listen and repeat</i>


<b>2. While you listen (page 56-57)</b>


<i>Listen to the conversation between John and David and circle the best </i>
<i>option (A, B, C or D) to complete the following sentences</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- C 3- C 5- B
2- A 4- A


<b>3. After you listen (page 57)</b>


<i>Ask and answer the question: “Would you prefer to do an undergraduate</i>


<i>course abroad or in your country?” Explain your choice.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answer


A: Would you prefer to do an undergraduate course abroad or in your
country?


B: I’d like to do an undergraduate course in my country.
A: Why so?


B: Because my English is not good enough and I can’t afford tuition fees
and accommodation for study overseas


………


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice listening at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 5 – D – Writing


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>24.10.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>29: Unit 5: </b>

<b>higher education</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 4</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>d - writing</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Writing a letter of request to apply for an undergraduate program in a university
in England.


2. Education: - Writing a letter of request.
3. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice (filling gaps or mixed sentences)
- Individual and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks



- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, letters of examples


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1 st)


2- Do AFTER YOU LISTEN (page 57) (1st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the requirements
-T explains the requirements
- Sts work in groups to
discuss about the form of a
request letter.


- T goes around and helps


- T gives suggested
expressions



- T explains the meaning
* Gifted students


- Sts work individually to


<i>You want to apply for an undergraduate program in a university in </i>
<i>England. Write a letter of request (about 150 words) to UCAS to ask for </i>
<i>the information about the admission requirements to the university using </i>
<i>information in the Reading and Speaking section on pages 52 & 56.</i>


<b>1. Guide to write</b>


<i>* Giving outline</i>


1- Introduction: Give the reasons for making the request and mention the
position applied for


2- Body: - request what information you would like them to provide:
tuition fee, accommodation, exams ….


- Further information: say you would be happy to supply further
information about yourself.


3- Conclusion: End with a polite closing.


<i>* Suggested expressions</i>


- undergraduate course
- information about


- tuition fees
- accommodation
- yours faithfully


<b>2. Writing</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

write based on the guide line
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to write their
writing on the green board
- T corrects mistakes
- T collects some writings
* Poor students


- T gives them a mixed
letter


- Sts work in groups to
rearrange the letter


- T calls sts to talk about the
answers


- T corrects mistakes


Van Quan high school, Lap Thach district
Vinh Phuc province, Vietnam


November 4th<sub> 2009</sub>



Dear Sir/ Madam,


I have read a lot about tertiary study in the UK and very impressed by the
reputation of many famous university there. Now I am in the last year of
the high school and will finish secondary school education in 6 months. I
am very much interested in an undergraduate course on economics in
Burmingham university. Could you please send me some information
about the admission requirements, tuition fees, accommodation, exams
and the details of the course? I am ready to supply any information about
myself if necessary.


I look forward to hearing from you soon.
Yours faithfully,


Kim Thao Duyen


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice writing at home


- Do exercise part: Writing in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 5 – E – Language focus


<b>P.D: 25.10.2009</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>30: Unit 5: </b>

<b>higher education</b>




<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 5</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>E </b>

<b> language focus</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Pronunciation: Stress in words of more than three syllables
- Grammar: Conditional sentences


2. Education: Comparing with Vietnamese
3. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice



- Individual, pair and the whole class work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Read your writing at home (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>1. Pronunciation(page 58-59) : </b><i>Stress in words of more than three </i>
<i>syllables</i>


<i><b>a, Notes </b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

- T pronounces as a model
- T explains the stress


- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts practice


- T helps sts review
conditional sentences
- Sts practice


- Sts study exercise 1


- T explains the main points
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study exercise 2
- Sts do exercise
individually


- T goes around and helps
- Sts compare with a
partner


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study exercise 3
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


end in <b>–cy, -ty, -phy, -gy, -al…</b>


Eg: de

<b>mo</b>

cracy, relia

<b>bi</b>

lity, bi

<b>o</b>

logy, pho

<b>to</b>

graphy, eco

<b>no</b>

mical…
- Stress on the second syllable (counting from the last syllable) when
words begin with <b>inter-, anti-, above-, under-, …</b>


Eg: inter

<b>na</b>

tion, antibi

<b>o</b>

tic
- compound words


 Adj + n: stress on the first syllable


Eg:

<b>green</b>

house,

<b>black</b>

bird,

<b>blue</b>

eyes…


 Adj + V-ed: stress on the second syllable


Eg: bad-

<b>tem</b>

pered, old-

<b>fa</b>

shioned…


 Verbs: stress on the syllable after the prefix


Eg: under

<b>stand</b>

, over

<b>look</b>



<i><b>b, Listen and repeat(page 58)</b></i>



<i><b>c, Practice reading these sentences (page 59)</b></i>


<b>2. Reviewing grammar: </b><i>Structures of conditional sentences</i>


* Type 1: S1 + will V + O1 + if + S2 + V(s,es) + O2
Eg: I will pass my exam if I work hard.


* Type 2: S1 + would V + O1 + if + S2 + Ved1 + O2
Eg: I would study harder if I were five years younger.


* Type 3: S1 + would have Ved2 + O1 + if + S2 + had Ved2 + O2
Eg: I wouldn’t have caught a cold if I hadn’t got wet yesterday.


<b>3. Doing exercises (page 59-60)</b>
<i><b>a, Exercise 1 (page 59)</b></i>


<i>Complete the sentences using conditional sentence type 1</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers


2- You won’t be able to get into the examination room if you are 10
minutes late.


3- If you don’t send the application form on time, you won’t be able to /
allowed to take the entrance exam.


4- If you don’t have a reference letter, you won’t be able to / allowed to
submit your application form.



5- Unless you show your identity card, you won’t be able to get into the
examination room.


<i><b>b, Exercise 2 (page 50-51)</b></i>


<i>Express these situations using conditional sentence type II</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
2- If Sarah liked school, she would study hard.
3- I could do the test if ti weren’t too difficult.
4- Peter would read a lot if he found the time.
5- If I spoke Korean, I could translate this.


6- If they weren’t afraid of flying, they would travel far a lot.


<i><b>b, Exercise 3 (page 51)</b></i>


<i>Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


2- might have called 5- would have given
3- had installed 6- had had


4- would have made


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points



<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

- Do exercises in workbook – part: Language focus
- Prepare for the next period: Unit 6 – A – Reading


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>30.10.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>31: Unit 6: </b>

<b>future jobs</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 1</b>

<b>: </b>

A - Reading


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: Reading a passage about a job interview then doing the tasks
2. Education: - Connecting to sts’ future job advice.



3. Skills: Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Exercise 1 (page 59) (1 st)
2- Exercise 2 (page 60) (1 st)
3- Exercise 3 (page 60) (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>



- Sts study the task
- Sts work in groups
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts read through the
passage then find out new
words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Before you read (page 62)</b>


<i>* Tick (V) the factors that you think would help you succeed in a job </i>
<i>interview.</i>


- Feedback



1- wearing casual clothes 3- feeling self-confident


2- giving clear, honest answers 4- having a good sense of humor


<i>* Presenting the new words</i>


- stressful (a): gây ra căng thẳng


- vacancy (n): vị trí, chức vụ bỏ trống


- resumes (n): bản tóm tắt, sơ yếu lí lịch


- candidate (n): ngời dự thi, ngêi øng cư


- recommendation (n): sù giíi thiƯu, sù tiÕn cö


- to concentrate (v) : tËp trung
<b>2. While you read (page 63-65)</b>
<i><b>a. Task 1 (page 64)</b></i>


<i>These words are from the passage. Look back to the text and circle the </i>
<i>best meanings A, B or C.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- B 3- A
2- C 4- B


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

- Sts study task 2 carefully
- Sts read the passage


- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


<i>Decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F)</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers
1- F 5- T
2- T 6- F
3- F 7- F
4- T 8- T


<b>3. After you read (page 65)</b>


<i>Discuss the question: Which pieces of advice given in the passage do you</i>
<i>find most useful and least useful? Why?</i>


- Feedback
……….


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>



- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice reading at home
- Redo excercise at home


- Do exercise part: Reading in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 6 – B- Speaking


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>31.10.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>32: Unit 6: </b>

<b>future jobs</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 2</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>b - speaking</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>


<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Giving opinions about jobs.
2. Education: - Future jobs for students
3. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Pair, group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1 st)



2- Read the passage then do task 2 (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T gives new words


- T gives the meaning of the


<b>1. Task 1(page 66)</b>


<i>Match a job in A with at least two descriptions in B</i>


* Presenting new words
- imaginary (a)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

new words


- Sts pronounce after T


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts work in pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2


- T explains task 2
- Sts work in pairs
- T goes around and help
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task 3
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- irrigation (n)
- rewarding (a)
- fascinating (a)


* Feedback and give suggested answer:
1- a doctor: - take care of people’s health
- help to save people’s lives
2- a farmer: - construct irrigation systems
- apply new farming techniques


3- a tourist guide: - find good and safe hotels for customers
- take people to places of interest


4- a writer: - tell stories through pictures



- create imaginary characters and events


<b>2. Task 2 (page 66)</b>


<i>Discuss which of the jobs in column A you would/ would not like to do. </i>
<i>Explain why or why not? You can use the cues in the column B</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


1- I would like to work as a doctor. Working as a doctor would be a
fascinating job because I would have a chance to take care of people’s
health and help to save people’s lives.


2- I would like to work as a journalist. Working as a journalist would be
fascinating job because I would have a chance to travel all over the world
and meet many interesting people.


3- I wouldn’t like to work as a policeman. Working as a policeman would
be a dangerous job because I would face to criminals.


………


<b>3. Task 3 (page 67)</b>


<i>Talk about a job you may do after you finish school, using the following </i>
<i>cues.</i>


- Feedback
………….



<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice speaking at home


- Do exercise part: Speaking in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 6 – C- Listening


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>5.11.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>33: Unit 6: </b>

<b>future jobs</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 3</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>C- listening</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: Listening to someone talking about jobs in the United States and doing the tasks that
follow


2. Education: Connecting to jobs in Vietnam.
3. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>



- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Task 2 (2 sts)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- T gives new words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes
- Sts work in groups
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



<b>1. Before you listen (page 67)</b>


<i>* Below are the most important jobs in the US. Answer the question: </i>
<i>Which is the most popular job in Vietnam.</i>


- Feedback
…….


<i>* Presenting new words</i>


- accountant (n) : kÕ to¸n


- lawyer (n) : luËt s


- computer programmer (n) : ngêi viÕt chơng trình máy tính


- manufacturing (n) : sản xuất


- retail (n) : bán lẻ


- wholesale (n) : bán buôn


- category (n) : hạng, loại


- job market (n) : thì trờng việc làm


- transportation (n) : sự giao thông
<i>* Listen and repeat</i>



<b>2. While you listen (page 67-68)</b>
<i><b>a, Task 1 (page 67)</b></i>


<i>Listen to the passage and fill in the missing words in the boxes</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- Manufacturing 4- Finance
2- Service 5- Services
3- Transportation


<i><b>b, Task 2 (page 68)</b></i>


<i>Listen again and decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F)</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- T 4- F


2- T 5- F
3- T


<b>3. After you listen (page 68)</b>


<i>Summarize the passage using the information in Task 1 and 2</i>


- Feedback
………


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>



- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice listening at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 6 – D – Writing


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 4</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>d - writing</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Writing a formal letter of job application.
2. Education: - Future jobs



3. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Individual and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks


- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, letters of examples


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1 st)


2- Do AFTER YOU LISTEN (page 68) (1st)


III. New lesson




<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study task 1


-T explains the requirements
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to read the text
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2 carefully
- Sts read aloud the cues
- Sts discuss the cues
- T explains the form of the
letter of application.


- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to write their
writing on the green board
- T corrects mistakes
- T collects some writings


<b>1. Task 1 (page 68)</b>


<i>Read the following advertisement and fill in the notes</i>



- Feedback and give answers
1- Type of job: Tour guide


2- Level of education needed: High school diploma


3- Work experience: experience as a tour guide, fluent English


4- Character and interest: good manner, willing to work hard for long
hours.


<b>2. Task 2 (page 69)</b>


<i>Write a letter to Vina-tour, applying for the job mentioned in the </i>
<i>advertisement in Task 1.</i>


* Guide to write: Your letter should include the following details
1- Your name, address, date of writing.


2- Name and address of the company.
3- Greeting


4- Introduction: say where you saw the advertisement and why you are
writing the letter of application.


5- Body: mention your education, work experience and your character/
interests.


6- Conclusion: express your willingness to work for the company and
when you are available for interview.



7- Closing


* Feedback and give a suggested writing
Van Quan village, Lap Thach district
Vinh Phuc province, Vietnam


November 18th<sub> 2009</sub>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

250, Nguyen Du Street, Ha Noi
Dear Sir/ Madam,


I am writing in reply to your advertisement in the Vietnam news for
experienced English-speaking local guides to accompany foreign visitors
on trips throughout Vietnam.


I think I meet all of the qualifications that you specify. I was awarded
High school certificate two years ago. After leaving high school, I
worked as an accountant in the small travel agency for one year, where I
was given a training course on tourism. Then I had one year of


experience as a tour guide so I know many tourist areas in Vietnam and
have a basic knowledge of Vietnamese culture, history and geography
I speak English fluently. In addition, I am a sociable and confident person
and can work hard for long hours. I would like to work for you and
would appreciate the opportunity to discuss this position with you in
person.


I look forward to hearing from you at your convenience.
Yours faithfully,



Kim Thao Duyen


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice writing at home


- Do exercise part: Writing in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 6 – E – Language focus


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>10.11.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>35: Unit 6: </b>

<b>future jobs</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 5</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>E </b>

<b> language focus</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Pronunciation: Weak and strong forms of some conjunctions and prepositions
- Grammar: Relative clauses


2. Education: Comparing with Vietnamese
3. Skills: practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Individual, pair and the whole class work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4


12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Read your writing at home (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

- T explains


- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts practice


- Sts study exercise 1


- T explains the main points
and review relative clauses
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study exercise 2
- T reviews relative clauses
replaced by participle


clauses (Ving & Ved
phrases)


- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- Sts compare with another
couple


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<i>conjunctions and prepositions</i>


<i><b>a, Listen and repeat(page 69)</b></i>


<i><b>b, Practice reading these sentences (page 70)</b></i>
<b>2. Grammar (page 70-71): </b><i>Relative clauses</i>


<i><b>a, Exercise 1 (page 70)</b></i>


<i>Add </i><b>who, whoever, whose, whom </b><i>or </i><b>which</b><i> to complete the following </i>
<i>sentences</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers


1- whom 5- which 9- which
2- which 6- who 10- whom
3- whoever 7- whose



4- which 8- who


<i><b>b, Exercise 2 (page 70-71)</b></i>


<i>Join the following sentences in two ways</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- I read a book which was written by a friend of mine.
Or: I read a book written by a friend of mine.


2- A man who was carrying a lot of money in the box got on the bus.
Or: A man carrying a lot of money in the box got on the bus.


3- In the street, there were several people who were waiting for the shop
to open.


Or: In the street, there were several people waiting for the shop to open.
4- Britain imports many cars which were made in Japan.


Or: Britain imports many cars made in Japan.


5- There are a lot of people in your office who want to talk to you.
Or: There are a lot of people in your office wanting to talk to you.
6- The cowboy who had been wounded by an arrow fell of his horse.
Or: The cowboy wounded by an arrow fell of his horse.


7- Most of the people who were injured in the crash recovered quickly.
Or: Most of the people injured in the crash recovered quickly.



8- John, who wished he hadn’t come to the party, looked anxiously at this
watch.


Or: John wishing he hadn’t come to the party, looked anxiously at his
watch.


9- The children who were playing football in the schoolyard were my
students.


Or: The children playing football in the schoolyard were my students.
10- Vietnam exports a lot of rice which is grown mainly in the south of
the country.


Or: Vietnam exports a lot of rice grown mainly in the south of the
country.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home


- Do exercises in workbook – part: Language focus
- Prepare for the next period: Test yourself B


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>12.11.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>36: </b>

<b>test yourself b</b>




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>3</b></i> <i><b>4</b></i> <i><b>5</b></i> <i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


- Sts check themselves the knowledge of English they have learnt in the last three units (unit 4 – unit 6)
and prepare for the one period test.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Testing


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>



- Sts study the task


- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts do the task individually
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
carefully


- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about


their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts work individually


<b>1. Listening (page 72) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i>Listen to the passage about children education and complete the </i>
<i>following sentences.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- sorts of things 4- make them go
2- learn at all 5- a certain age
3- things for themselves


<b>2. Reading (page 72) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i>Read the passage and fill in each blank with a suitable word from the box</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- final 5- subjects 9- count
2- requirements 6- qualification 10- who
3- when 7- graded


4- courses 8- equivalent


<b>3. Grammar (page 73) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>



<i><b>a, Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it is similar</b></i>
<i><b>in meaning to the original sentence. (1.5 points)</b></i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- The windows have been cleaned.


2- A supermarket is going to be built in this area.
3- La is said to have won a special prize.


4- If you don’t listen carefully you won’t know what to do.
5- If I had a car, I could give you a lift.


6- If we had brought a city map, we wouldn’t have got lost.


<i><b>b, Join the sentences, using relative clauses. (1 point)</b></i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- A girl who answered the phone told me you were out.


2- The chair which was broken two days ago has now been repaired.
3- I saw some people whose car had broken down.


4- I recently went back to my hometown where I was born.


<b>4. Writing (page 73) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- T collects and corrects
some writings


<i>letter of application for the University’s Employment service. </i>


* Suggestions


1- Reason for writing 4- Qualifications
2- English proficiency 5- Work experience
3- Computer skills 6- Character and interests
* Mark levels


- Structures: 1 point
- Content: 0.5 point
- Vocabulary: 1 point


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home


- Prepare for the one period test.


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>15.11.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>37: </b>

<b>The one period test</b>



<b>T.D</b>


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


-Check sts’ knowledge of English from unit 4 to unit 6.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


-


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: pens


- Teacher: English paper test, topics and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson




<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T gives sts requirements
- T gives sts test papers
- Sts do the test individually
- T collect test papers.


<b>1. Topics: - </b>4 topics<i>(handouts)<b> </b></i>
<b>2. Mark levels and answer keys.</b>
<i><b>a,Topic 01</b></i>


<i>I. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. B 2. C 3. A 4. A


<i>II. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. A 2. A 3. A 4. C
5. A 6. A 7. B 8. D
9. A 10. A 11. B 12. A


<i>III. 0.5 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. The most important change has been the shift from manufacturing jobs
to service jobs.


2. 80 %
3. 30 %



4. Manufacturing jobs are jobs in which people make something.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

1. whom 2. which 3. whose 4. which
5. which 6. who 7. which 8. who


<i>V. 0.5 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. If Sarah liked school, she would study hard.
2. If I spoke English, I could translate this.
3. It is said that they built this hospital last year.
4. The house will be repainted soon.


<i><b>b,Topic 02</b></i>


<i>I. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. A 2. D 3. A 4. B


<i>II. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. A 2. A 3. D 4. C
5. B 6. A 7. A 8. D
9. B 10. A 11. A 12. B


<i>III. 0.5 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. Five.
2. 30 %
3. 90 %



4. Service jobs are jobs in which workers provide services.


<i>IV. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. which 2. who 3. which 4. which
5. who 6. which 7. who 8. which


<i>V. 0.5 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. If the test was easy, I could do it.


2. If Peter could find the time, he would read a lot.
3. It is said that she lives near here.


4. English will be spoken at the conference.


<i><b>c,Topic 03</b></i>


<i>I. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. C 2. A 3. D 4. C


<i>II. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. C 2. A 3. A 4. A
5. D 6. D 7. B 8. A
9. B 10. D 11. B 12. B


<i>(Part III , IV , V are the same as topic 1)</i>



<i><b>d,Topic 04</b></i>


<i>I. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. A 2. C 3. A 4. C


<i>II. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. B 2. C 3. B 4. A
5. A 6. C 7. C 8. D
9. B 10. D 11. A 12. A


<i>(Part III , IV , V are the same as topic 2)</i>


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo the test at home


<b>P.D:16.11.2009</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>38: </b>

<b>paying back the one period test</b>



<b>T.D</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>3</b></i> <i><b>4</b></i> <i><b>5</b></i> <i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>



- Paying English papers back to sts.


- Correcting common mistakes and giving remarks on the test so that sts can do the other test better.
- Giving answer keys.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


-


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: pens


- Teacher: English papers and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>



- Sts study the test


- Sts compare with a partner
- T gives remarks on the test
- T gives answer keys
- T corrects common
mistakes


1- Paying back the English papers
2- Giving remarks on the test.


- Students: lazy and lack of knowledge
- Best part:


- Worst part :
- Best work:
- Worst work:


3- Correct common mistakes
-


-
-



<i><b>-IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points



<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo the test at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 7- A Reading


<b>P.D:19.11.2009</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>39: Unit 7: </b>

<b>economic reforms</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 1</b>

<b>: </b>

A - Reading


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: Reading a passage about “Doi moi” (Renovation) in Vietnam then doing the tasks
2. Education: - Letting sts know the importance of the leading of the Vietnamese communist party


in our daily life.


3. Skills: Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (no)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about


their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts read through the
passage then find out new
words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


<b>1. Before you read (page 74)</b>


<i>* Ask and answer the following questions</i>



- Feedback and give suggested answers


1- I can see a picture of a small village in Vietnam in the past.
2- I am sure that the people in the picture lead to a very poor life.


3- In my opinion, the government should carry out economic reforms.


<i>* Presenting the new words</i>


- economic reform (n) cải cách kinh tế


- aware (a) nhận thức


- National Congress (n) Đại hội Đảng toàn quốc


- renovation (n) sự đổi mới


- dominate (v) thèng trÞ, chi phèi


- stagnant (a) tr× trƯ


- inflation (n) lạm phát


- eliminate (v) loại bỏ, loại trừ


- subsidy (n) sù bao cÊp


- shift (v) đổi chỗ



- priority (n) sù u thÕ


- intervention (n) sù can thiÖp


- subsequent (a) đến sau, theo sau


- commitment (n) sù cam kÕt


- administrative (a) hµnh chÝnh


- adopt (v) chÊp nhËn, th«ng qua


- inefficient (a) thiếu khả năng


- substantial (a) ln, ỏng k


- ethnic minority (n) d©n téc thiĨu sè
<b>2. While you read (page 75-76)</b>
<i><b>a. Task 1 (page 76)</b></i>


<i>Give the Vietnamese equivalents to the following words and phrases</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- under-developed : cha ph¸t triĨn, ph¸t triĨn thÊp


2- government subsidies : sù bao cÊp cña chÝnh phñ


3- government commitment : sù cam kÕt cña chÝnh phñ



4- dissolve : tan r·
<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 76)</b></i>


<i>Decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F)</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 3
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


<i><b>c. Task 3(page 76)</b></i>


<i>Answer the following questions</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


1-It was officially initiated in 1986 by our Vietnamese Communist Party.


2- Its aim was to restructure the economy of Vietnam and to raise the
living standards of the people.


3- The measures the government introduced to implement Doi Moi were
( as follows):


+ eliminated government subsidies.


+ shifted economic priority from heavy industry to three major economic
program: production of food, production of consumer goods and


production of export.


+ reduced state intervention in business.


+ opened trade relations with all countries in the world.
+ encouraged foreign and domestic private investment.


4- Since Doi Moi, Vietnam has undergone substantial changes. They are:
+ productivity and agricultural exports have constantly increased.


+ the farmers have enjoyed land use rights and have had greater choice to
use their agricultural land…… to enjoy education and training.


5- We believe that ………build a better life for our people.


<b>3. After you read (page 77)</b>


<i>Scan the passage and make brief notes of the following points</i>



- Feedback and give suggested ideas
+ Vietnam before Doi Moi


+ The government’s renovation measures
+ Vietnam since Doi Moi


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice reading at home
- Redo excercises at home


- Do exercise part: Reading in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 7 – B- Speaking


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>22.11.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>40: Unit 7: </b>

<b>economic reforms</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 2</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>b - speaking</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>



1. Knowledge: - Describing details in pictures and talking about changes the new economic reform has
brought about.


2. Education: - Letting sts know about the changes the new economic reform has brought about.
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Pair, group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1 st)


2- Read the passage then do task 3 (1 st)


III. New lesson




<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts work in pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2
- T explains task 2
- Sts work in pairs
- T goes around and help
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task 3
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Task 1(page 78)</b>



<i>Study the pictures and answer the following questions</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answer:


1- Each pair of pictures tells us about the changes of economy and
people’s life.


2- In each pair of pictures, I can see a better condition: modern school,
modern factory.


3- I think people have carried out economic reforms to achieve these
changes.


<b>2. Task 2 (page 78)</b>


<i>The country of Fantasia started its overall reforms in the early 1970s. </i>
<i>The reform has brought about positive effects in many sectors of the </i>
<i>economy, particularly in education, health care and agriculture.</i>
<i>Suggest what the government and the people of Fantasia have done to </i>
<i>improve their economy in these sectors. Use the cues below</i>


* Suggestions


1- Structures: S + should + V + O
2- Verbs


+ Education: build, rebuild, change, improve, raise, offer
+ Health care: build, train, improve, raise, train


+ Agriculture: follow, use, build, improve


* Feedback and give suggested answers


1- The government and the people of Fantasia have done something to
improve their education such as:


- They should rebuild the curriculum and textbooks.
- They should build more school.


- They should change teaching and learning methods.
- They should improve teachers’ salaries.


- They should provide more equipment and facilities.


-They should offer more scholarships for poor or disadvantaged students.
2- In their health care:


- They should build more hospitals.


- They should train more highly qualified doctors.


- They should provide more medical equipment and facilities.
- ……….


<b>3. Task 3 (page 78)</b>


<i>Report to the class on the measures the government and the people of </i>
<i>Fantasia have taken to develop their country in education, health care </i>
<i>and agriculture.</i>


- Feedback


………….


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice speaking at home


- Do exercise part: Speaking in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 7 – C- Listening


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>24.11.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>41: Unit 7: </b>

<b>economic reforms</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 3</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>C- listening</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Listening to a passage about the world population then doing the tasks that follow.
2. Education: - Letting sts know about the world population and be aware of the importance of the fast
developing population and its effects.


3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>



- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Task 2 (3 sts)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- T corrects mistakes
- T gives new words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner


<b>1. Before you listen (page 79)</b>


<i>* Discuss the question: “Do you think that drug-taking should be </i>
<i>banned? Why/ Why not?”</i>


- Feedback and give a suggested answer


- I think that drug-taking should be banned because drug makes people
lose their mind.


<i>* Presenting new words</i>


- rationally (a) có lí trí



- discourage (v) làm nản lòng


- drug-taker (n) ngêi sư dơng ma t


- Islander (n) ngời dân ở đảo


- illegal (a) phi ph¸p


- eventually (adv) cuèi cïng


- inhabitant (n) d©n c
<i>* Listen and repeat</i>


<b>2. While you listen (page 79)</b>


<i>You will hear Dr. Brown, a world population expert, talk about the world</i>
<i>population. Listen to the interview and do the tasks that follow.</i>


<i><b>a, Task 1 (page 79)</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice



- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes


- Sts work in groups
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- F (Atlantic Ocean) 6- F (Nobody took)
2- F (a plant) 7- T


3- T 8- T


4- T 9- F (other countries)
5- F (on TV)


<i><b>b, Task 2 (page 79)</b></i>


<i>Listen again and answer the questions</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- They discovered a plant which contained a powerful drug.
2- They grew it all over the island.



3- The negative effects the drug brought about were: workers and farmers
became lazy; children didn’t want to go to school; the whole population
began to run short of food.


4- The government took three measures: introduced a law to make the
drug illegal; put the drug-takers into prison; exported the drug to other
countries.


5- Eventually they decided to export the drug to other countries.


<b>3. After you listen (page 80)</b>


<i>Discuss the question: “Do you think that the government of Tango’s </i>
<i>decision to export the drug to other countries was a better solution? </i>
<i>Why/ Why not?”</i>


- Feedback
………


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice listening at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 7 – D – Writing


<b>P.D:28.11.2009</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>42: Unit 7: </b>

<b>economic reforms</b>




<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 4</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>d - writing</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Writing a report based on the given information.


2. Education: - Letting sts know be able to read the table and write a report.
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Individual and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks


- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, letters of examples


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting



- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

1- New words (1 st)
2- Task 2 (page 79) (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study task 1


-T explains the requirements
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to read the text
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2 carefully
- Sts read aloud the cues
- Sts discuss the cues
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to write their
writing on the green board


- T corrects mistakes
- T collects some writings


<i>The table below presents the achievements the government and the </i>
<i>people of Tango have gained in some branches of the economy after two </i>
<i>decades of economic reform. Read the information in the table and do </i>
<i>the tasks that follow.</i>


<b>1. Task 1 (page 80)</b>


<i>Answer the following questions</i>


- Feedback and give answers


1- The economic situation in Tango before 1980 was in ruins.


2- The economic situation in Tango from 1980 to 2000 became much
better.


3- The government and the people of Tango have had proper policies to
farmers and workers.


<b>2. Task 2 (page 80-81)</b>


<i>Based on the information given in the table, write a report of 150 words </i>
<i>on the economic development of Tango.</i>


* Guide to write: Your letter should include the following details
1- Before 1980



- economy: under-developed / in ruins - children: not go to school
- population: stopped working - food: short


- wokers and farmers: lazy
2- Measures


- apropriate policies o encourage farmers, workers to work more
efficiently.


- open trade relations with all countries in the world.
- encourage foreign and domestic private investment.
3- Achievements


- productions: increase in all branches
- people: work harder


- children: enjoy school


* Feedback and give a suggested writing


The government and people of Tango started their overall economic
reforms in the mid 1970s. Before that time, the economy of the country
was in ruins. The whole population stopped working to enjoy themselves.
Workers and farmers became lazy. Children didn’t want to go to school.
There was a shortage of food in the whole country. All these forced the
government to take measures to reform the country economy. They
carried out appropriate policies to encourage every one to work more
efficiently. They opened trade relations with all countries in the world.
They encouraged foreign and domestic private investment.



Since that time, they have undergone a lot of changes. Productions in all
branches have increased especially in agriculture, fishery, forestry,
industry, construction and exports. People have worked harder and
children have enjoyed school. They hope that they will gain more and
more achievements.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

- Do exercise part: Writing in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 7 – E – Language focus


<b>P.D: </b><i><b>29.11.2009</b></i><b> </b>

<b>§43: Unit 7: economic reforms</b>


<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 5</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>E </b>

<b> language focus</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Pronunciation: Strong and weak forms of auxiliaries


- Grammar: Adverbial clauses of concession: <i><b>(al)though, even though</b></i>



2. Education: - Comparing with Vietnamese
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Individual, pair and the whole class work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- (al)though, even though, in spite of, despite? (1 st)
2- Because / because of? (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>



- T pronounces as a model
- T explains


- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts practice


- T reviews grammar notes
- Sts give examples


- Sts study exercise 1
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Pronunciation(page 81) : </b><i>Strong and weak forms of auxiliaries</i>


<i><b>a, Listen and repeat(page 81)</b></i>


<i><b>b, Practice reading these sentences (page 81)</b></i>
<b>2. Grammar (page 82-83): </b><i>(al)though, even though</i>


* (al)though / even though + 1 clause , main- clause
Eg: Although it rained, I went swimming. (1)
* in spite of / despite + a noun phrase / V-ing
Eg: (1) = In spite of raining, I went swimming.



* Because + a clause = because of + a noun phrase / V-ing
Eg: Because I was tired, I stayed at home.


= Because of being tired, I stayed at home.


<i><b>a, Exercise 1 (page 82)</b></i>


<i>Combine these sentences with </i><b>although / even though.</b>


- Feedback and give correct answers


1- Although it rained a lot, we enjoyed our vocation.


2- Although we had planned everything carefully, a lot of thing went
wrong.


3- Although the doctor has advised him to quit, Bob still smokes 20
cigarettes a day.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

- Sts study exercise 2
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- Sts compare with another
couple


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study exercise 3
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


6- I didn’t go to bed early although I was really sleepy.


<i><b>b, Exercise 2 (page 82 -83)</b></i>


<i>Complete the sentences. Use </i><b>although + a clause</b><i> from the box.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- Although I was very tired.


2- Although I had never seen her before.
3- Although it was pretty cold.


4- Although we don’t like them very much.
5- Although I didn’t speak the language.
6- Although the heat was on.


7- Although I had met her twice before.


8- Although we have known each other for a long time.


<i><b>c, Exercise 3 (page 83)</b></i>



<i>Complete the following sentences. </i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- we forgot many things.


2- they were very hungry.


3- he could speak / read the language very much.
4- Although he had revised everything.


5- it is pretty cold / there hasn’t been any rain.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home


- Do exercises in workbook – part: Language focus
- Prepare for the next period: Unit 8 – A: Reading


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>4.12.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>44: Unit 8: </b>

<b>life in the future</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 1</b>

<b>: </b>

A - Reading


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: Reading a passage about life in the future then doing the tasks


2. Education: - Believing in a better life in the future because of the advanced life conditions.```
3. Skills: Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan



<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

3- Exercise 3 (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts read through the
passage then find out new
words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words



- Sts pronounce after T


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 3
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


<b>1. Before you read (page 74)</b>


<i>* Discuss the following questions</i>



- Feedback and give suggested answers


1- I think life will be better in the future because science and technology
are getting better and better.


2- We might travel to the moon.
- Robots will do most of work.
- We will find more perfect food.


<i>* Presenting the new words</i>


- pessimistic (a) bi quan
- pessimist (n) ngêi bi quan
- optimistic (a) l¹c quan
- terrorism (n) sù khđng bè
- terrorist (n) qu©n khđng bè
- burden


- space-shuttle (n)


- labour-saving (a) tiết kiệm sức lao động
- micro-technology (n) công nghệ vi mô
- telecommunication (n) viễn thông
<b>2. While you read (page 86)</b>
<i><b>a. Task 1 (page 86)</b></i>


<i>Find words or phrases in the passage which have the following </i>
<i>meanings.</i>



- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- pessimists 4- terrorism
2- optimists 5- wiped out
3- economic depression 6- space shuttle


<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 86)</b></i>


<i>Answer the following questions.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers


1- Many large corporations will be wiped out and millions of jobs will be
lost.


2- The security of the earth will be threatened by terrorism as terrorist
groups will become more powerful and more dangerous.


3- People will live in much cleaner environment, breathing fresher air
and eating healthier foods. They will also be better looked after by a
modern medical system. Domestic chores will no longer be a burden
thank to the inventions of labor-saving devices.


4- They are development in micro-technology computer and
telecommunication.


<i><b>c. Task 3 (page 86)</b></i>


<i>Complete the notes about how technology will influence our life in the </i>
<i>future.</i>



- Feedback and give suggested answers


1-Work: - Factories will be run by robots; offices will go electronic;
many people will work from home.


2- Travel: - Travel by space-shuttle will be very fast, at 15,000 kph; cars
could run on electricity or methane gas and will be fitted with computers.


<b>3. After you read (page 86)</b>


<i>Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of robots.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

- Sts study the task
- Sts work in groups
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


1- Advantages: - save labor, do difficult jobs so that men have more time
to enjoy life or do more creative work.


2- Disadvantages: - replace human beings in many fields so that people
will lose their jobs or go jobless.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points



<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice reading at home
- Redo excercise at home


- Do exercise part: Reading in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 8 – B- Speaking


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>5.12.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>45: Unit 8: </b>

<b>life in the future</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 2</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>b - speaking</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - The future perfect tense: <i><b>will have + Vp2</b></i>


<i><b> </b></i> - Predicting what will have happened in the future.
2. Education: - Believing in a better life in the future.


3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1 st)


2- Read the passage then do task 2 (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T & sts revise the future
perfect tense


- Sts give examples



- T explains the meaning of
some phrases given


<b>1. Task 1(page 87)</b>


<i>Look at the newspaper cuttings from the future, and say what will have </i>
<i>happened by the end of the 21st<sub> century.</sub></i>


<i><b>a, Future perfect tense</b>: will have + Vp2</i>


(Used with: by the time ………..- future time)
Eg: By the time next week, we will have finished it.


<i><b>b, Practice the task</b></i>


* Explaining phrases:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts work in pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2
- T explains task 2
- Sts work in pairs
- T goes around and help
- T calls sts to talk about


their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task 3
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


* Feedback and give suggested answer:


2- By the end of the 21st<sub> century, the third city on the moon will be </sub>


opened. The new city will have the population of over 200,000 people.
3- By the end of the 21st<sub> century, scientists will have found a cure for the </sub>


common cold.


4- By the end of the 21st<sub> century, the oldest world citizen will have </sub>


celebrated her 150th<sub> birthday.</sub>


5- By the end of the 21st<sub> century, Vietnam tourism will have welcome the</sub>


50th<sub> holiday-maker back from Jupiter.</sub>


6- By the end of the 21st<sub> century, cars will have run on sea water.</sub>


<b>2. Task 2 (page 88)</b>


<i>Which of these predictions are likely / unlikely to happen? Give at least </i>
<i>two reasons for each.</i>


* Suggestions of reasons


- thank to the developments of science and technology.
- there will be more and more diseases


- living standards will have been improved.
- the cure for fatal diseases will have been found.
- It’s too far from the earth.


- it’s too cold and hot there.


- there’s no water there / The atmosphere is too thin there.
- It’s too costly / just impossible to do that.


* Feedback and give suggested answers


1- I think it is very likely that scientists will have found a cure for the
common cold by the end of the 21st<sub> century thanks to the developments of</sub>


science and technology.


2- In my opinion, it’s unlikely that by the end of the 21st<sub> century people </sub>


will be living to the age of 150 because there will be more and more
diseases.



………


<b>3. Task 3 (page 88)</b>


<i>Make some more predictions about what life will be like one hundred </i>
<i>years from now.</i>


- Feedback
………….


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice speaking at home


- Do exercise part: Speaking in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 8 – C- Listening


<b>P.D:6.12.2009</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>46: Unit 8: </b>

<b>life in the future</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 3</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>C- listening</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Listening to an interview about people’s life expectancy in the future then doing the
tasks that follow.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan



<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b>(15 minute test)</i>


1- Topics (handouts given)
2- Mark levels and answer keys:
a, Topic 01:


1. where 2. who 3. which 4. who 5. who
6. where 7. which 8. who 9. which 10. whose
b, Topic 02:


1. where 2. which 3. who 4. whose 5. who
6. where 7. whose 8. who 9. which 10. which


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- T corrects mistakes
- T gives new words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully
- The whole class listen to


<b>1. Before you listen (page 88)</b>


<i>* Discuss the question: “Which of the following factors do you think </i>
<i>might help people have a long and healthy life?”</i>


- Feedback and give a suggested answer



+ eating healthy food + laughing a lot
+ doing exercise + going to bed early.


<i>* Presenting new words</i>


- incredible (a): không thể tin đợc
- centenarian (n): ngời sống tới 100 tuổi
- eradicate (v): nhổ rễ, trừ tiệt


- life expectancy (n): tuæi thä dù tÝnh
- eternal life (n): cc sèng vÜnh viƠn
- to mushroom (v): bïng nỉ


- fatal (a): gây tai hoạ, hiểm nghèo
<i>* Listen and repeat</i>


<b>2. While you listen (page 89)</b>


<i>Listen to the interview about people’s life expectancy in the future and do</i>
<i>the tasks that follow.</i>


<i><b>a, Task 1 (page 79)</b></i>


<i>Decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F)</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- F (many scientists) 4- T
2- F (The centenarian …) 5- T
3- F (80)



<i><b>b, Task 2 (page 79)</b></i>


<i>Listen again and answer the questions about the interview.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

the disk twice
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes


- Sts work in groups
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


2- The development in medical science is the most important factor.
Because nobody dies from old age, just from diseases that affect people
when they are get older.


3- In ten years’ time AIDS will also be brought under control. / We will
have been able to bring AIDS under control.


<b>3. After you listen (page 89)</b>


<i>Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of having a very long life.</i>



- Feedback


1- Advantages: - do many things they want to do / enjoy life more.
- see their children and grand-children grow up.
- help their children and grand-children.


- children and grand-children are happy with them.
2- Disadvantages: - too weak to do things and often ill.


- feel lonely when children have grown up and busy
with their own life and friends are dead.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice listening at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 8 – D – Writing


<b>P.D:12.12.2009</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>47: Unit 8: </b>

<b>life in the future</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 4</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>d - writing</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Describing the world in which you would like to live in the year 2020.
2. Education: - Knowing how to describe the future life.


3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Individual and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks


- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, letters of examples



<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Talk about the advantages and disadvantages of having a very long life. (2 sts)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study task 1


-T explains the requirements
- T gives new words and
phrases


<b>1. Task 1 (page 89-90)</b>


<i>Your school organizes a competition for students to write about <b>The </b></i>
<i><b>world in which you would like to live in the year 2020.</b>Below is an essay</i>
<i>by one of the students. Read and answer the questions about it.</i>


* Presenting new words



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

- T explains the meanings
- Sts practice reading them


- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to read the text
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2 carefully
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to write their
writing on the green board
- T corrects mistakes
- T collects some writings


- conflict (n): sự xung đột
- harmony (n): sự hài hồ


- materialistic (a): chđ nghÜa vËt chÊt
* New phrases


- under the threat of terrorism: trong sự đe doạ của nạn khđng bè
- live in harmony: sèng trong sù hµi hoµ



- my main desire is: khát khao chủ yếu của tôi lµ…


*Feedback and give answers


1- World peace: peaceful world, no war, no conflicts, no threat of
terrorism, people live in harmony.


- Employment: everyone has a job.


- Environment: clean and healthy, less noise, less pollution, larger parks,
wild life is protected.


- People: less materialistic, less selfish, less violent and more loving.
2- Yes, they are.


3- Yes, I do. It is living standard.


<b>2. Task 2 (page 90)</b>


<i>Write about the ideal world in which you would like to live in the year </i>
<i>2020, using the ideas you have discussed in Task 1.</i>


* Guide to write:


- Main points: + world peace
+ employment
+ environment
+ people


+ living standard


* Feedback


………..


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice writing at home


- Do exercise part: Writing in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 8 – E – Language focus


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>14.12.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>48: Unit 8: </b>

<b>life in the future</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 5</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>E </b>

<b> language focus</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>


<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Pronunciation: Contracted forms of auxiliaries
- Grammar: prepositions and articles


2. Education: - Comparing with Vietnamese
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Individual, pair and the whole class work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6



<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- How to use <b>a / an / the</b>? Give examples


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T pronounces as a model
- T explains


- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts practice


- T reviews grammar notes
- Sts answer questions: How
to use prepositions?


- Sts give examples


What about the articles?
- Sts give examples


- Sts study exercise 1
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study exercise 2
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- Sts compare with another


<b>1. Pronunciation(page 90) : </b><i>Contracted forms of auxiliaries (continued)</i>


<i><b>a, Read the following phrases (page 90)</b></i>
<i><b>b, Practice reading these sentences (page 91)</b></i>
<b>2. Grammar (page 91-92): </b><i>(al)though, even though</i>


* Prepositions:


1- verb + prep 2- adj + prep 3- prep. + Noun
- <i>Give the Vietnamese meaning of the words</i>


1- to believe in sb (v) = to trust sb


2- to believe in sb/sth ( tin vào sự hiện hữu của ai / cái gì)


3- die of (an illness / hanger / grief …….) chết vì ốm, đói, đau buồn….
4- get married to sb = mary sb ( lấy ai )


5-warn sb about / agianst sth : Khiến cho ai cảnh giác để đề phịng cái gì .
6- in time (for sth / to do sth ) ( early enough ) : Đúng giờ/ kịp giờ )
7- on business ; nhằm mục đích kinh doanh .


* Articles: <b>a / an / the</b>



Eg: 1- <i>Take <b>a </b>cup from <b>the </b>cup-board and hold it under <b>the</b> spout </i>
<i> 2- Please turn off <b>the </b>lights when you leave home</i>


<i> 3- Please close <b>the </b>.door</i>


a- <i>Indefinite articles</i>


- We use <i><b>a / an</b></i> when we don’t know which one , it is not unique and it
has not been mentioned before


Eg: He is studying for <b>an</b> important exam
b- <i>Definite article</i>


- We use <i><b>the</b></i> when we know which one because
- It has been mentioned before


Eg: <b>The</b> exam is at the end of May


- It is defined by a phrase or a clause with follows
Eg: <b>The</b> car we had before was really old


- It is unique


Eg: <b>The</b> engine was in a terrible state


<b> The</b> Pope is going to visit next year
c-<i> No article</i>


- We don’t normally use an article when we make generalizations
Eg: <b>Cats</b> are very independent creatures



<b>3. Doing exercises</b>
<i><b>a, Exercise 1 (page 91)</b></i>


<i>Choose the appropriate prepositions</i><b>.</b>


- Feedback and give correct answers


1- in 4- at 7- about 9- between/ opposite
2- of 5- to 8- for 10- to


3- on 6- in


<i><b>b, Exercise 2 (page 92)</b></i>


<i>Put <b>a / an, the </b>or <b>Ø </b>in each space to complete the following sentences.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

couple


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


2- Ø – Ø – Ø 7- the – Ø
3- Ø – the – the 8- an – the – the
4- the – Ø 9- Ø – the
5- the – Ø 10- Ø – a


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>



- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home


- Do exercises in workbook – part: Language focus
- Prepare for the next period: Test yourself C


<b>P.D:16.12.2009 </b>

<b>§</b>

<b>49: </b>

<b>test yourself c</b>



<b>T.D: </b>
<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>



<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


- Sts check themselves the knowledge of English they have learnt in the last three units (unit 7 – unit 8)
and prepare for the first term test.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Testing


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task



- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts do the task individually
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
carefully


- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs


<b>1. Listening (page 93) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i>Listen to the passage making predictions about the second half of the 21st</i>


<i>century. Choose the best answer from the options A, B or C.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- B 3- A 5- C
2- C 4- B


<b>2. Reading (page 94) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>



<i>Read the passage and decide whether the following statements are true </i>
<i>(T) or false (F).</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- F 3- T 5- F
2- F 4- T


<b>3. Grammar (page 95) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i>a, Put </i><b>a/ an, the </b><i>or no article<b> Ø </b>in each space to complete the sentences.</i>
<i>(1.5 points)</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts work individually
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- T collects and corrects
some writings


<i>b, From each pair of sentences, make one sentence with </i><b>Although </b><i>or </i>


<b>even though</b><i>. (1 point)</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- Although Nam worked very hard, he didn’t pass the exam.
2- Although I was very tired, I couldn’t sleep.


3- Even though she had all the necessary qualifications, she didn’t get a
job.


4- Although traffic was bad, we arrived on time.


<b>4. Writing (page 73) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i>In 150 words, write a passage about the changes in our lives in the next </i>
<i>30 years. </i>


* Suggestions


1- People 3- Transportation
2- Food and water 4- Communications
* Mark levels


- Structures: 1 point


- Content: 0.5 point
- Vocabulary: 1 point


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home
- Revise for the first term test.


<b>P.D: </b>

<b>§</b>

<b>50</b>

:

<b>Revision 1 for the first term test</b>


T.D:



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>



<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


- Revising the main points for the first term test: Pronunciation, stress and exercise 1


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Individual, pair and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: notebooks


- Teacher: handouts and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6
- Chatting


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>



- T guides sts to revise for


<b>1. Guiding to revise for the first term test</b>


- Pronuciation and stress: + -s, -es, -ed


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

their first term test at home


- T helps sts revise –s, -es,
-ed by asking some
questions


- Sts gives examples
- T corrects mistakes


- T helps sts revise stress in
two syllable words by
asking some questions
- Sts gives examples
- T corrects mistakes
- T gives sts handouts
- Sts study exercise 1 and do
it in pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their asnwers


- T corrects mistakes


- Grammar: + verb tenses


+ reported speech
+ passive voice


+ conditional sentences


+ relative promouns and relative clauses
+ although / because


+ word forms
- Part E (unit 1 – unit 7)


<b>2. Pronunciation: </b>
<i><b>a, -s, -es and –ed</b></i>


+ <b>-es</b>: /iz/ if verbs and nouns end in: <i><b>s, x, z, sh, ch</b></i>


Eg: misses, boxes, buzzes, washes, teaches ...


+ <b>-s</b>: /s/ if verbs and nouns end in: <i><b>t, k, p, gh, th (t, k, p, f, </b></i><i><b>)</b></i>


Eg: students, cooks, stops, lauughs, baths ....
+ <b>-s</b>: /z/ the rest


Eg: lives, plays, keys, phones, reads, boils ....


<i><b>b, -ed</b></i>


+ -ed: /t/ if verbs end in: <i><b>s, x, z, sh, ch, k, p, gh, th (s, z, </b></i><i><b>, t</b></i><i><b>, k, p, f, </b></i><i><b>)</b></i>


Eg: missed, mixed, buzzed, brushed, watched, cooked, helped, laughed,


bathed ...


<b>3. Stress</b>:<i><b> in two syllable words</b></i>


- 1st<sub> syllable – words are normally nouns and adjectives</sub>


Eg: Nouns: paper, student, father, people, action....
Adjectives: happy, waving, famous, tired, pointing...


- 2nd<sub> syllable – words are normally verbs and prepositions or particles</sub>


Eg: Verbs: attract, believe, advise, report, arrive ...
Prepositions and particles: between, across, abroad ...


<b>4. Exercise 1 </b>(Handout): <i>Put the verbs in the correct tense</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- was swimmimg – stole 6- got – was shining
2- press 7- would tell


3- has sleft 8- am working


4- would have had 9- had known – would have visited
5- will you do 10- didnot have


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


-Summarize the main points



<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo excercises at home
- Prepair for the next period


<b>P.D: </b>

<b>§</b>

<b>51</b>

:

<b>Revision 2 for the first term test</b>


T.D:



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


- Revising the main points for the first term test: Relative pronouns and relative clauses (exercise 2 + 5)


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: notebooks


- Teacher: handouts and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6
- Chatting


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T helps sts revise relative
pronouns and relative
clauses by asking questions
- Sts gives examples


- T corrects mistakes
- T gives sts handouts
- Sts study exercise 2 and do
it in pairs



- T calls sts to talk about
their asnwers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study exercise 5 and do
it in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their asnwers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Exercise 2 (</b>Handout): <i><b>Put who, where, which, whose to complete the</b></i>
<i><b>sentences</b></i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- where 6- who
2- who 7- which
3- which 8- where
4- whose 9- who
5- who 10- whose


<b>2. Exercise 5 </b>(Handout): <i>Combine the sentences using relative pronouns</i>.
1.The soup which I had for lunch was too salty.


2.The pill which I took made me sleepy.



3.Many men who went on strike were in fact willing to accept the
company’s revised pay offer.


4.The girl who lives next to my house is very friendly.
5.A lion is an animal which lives in Africa.


6.The woman whose son works with me in a factory predicted my future.
7.The bus which I take to school every morning is always crowded.
8.This is a picture of the village where we grew.


9.He gave orders to the manager who passed them on to the supervisors.
10.Tom, whose car broke down, had been driving all day.


11.The woman whose health has’t been good recently has gone into
hospital for some tests.


12.That man whose name I can’t remember over there is an artist.
13.I went to see the doctor who told me to rest for a few days.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


-Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo excercises at home
- Prepair for the next period


<b>P.D: </b>

<b>§</b>

<b>52</b>

:

<b>Revision 3 for the first term test</b>


T.D:




<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Individual, pair and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: notebooks


- Teacher: handouts and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>


<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6
- Chatting


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T helps sts revise passive
voice, conditional sentences
and reported speech by
asking questions


- Sts gives examples
- T corrects mistakes
- T gives sts handouts
- Sts study exercise 3 and do
it in pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their asnwers


- T corrects mistakes



- Sts study exercise 4 and do
it in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their asnwers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Exercise 3 (</b>Handout): <i>Put<b> because, because of, although, inspite of </b></i>


<i>to complete the sentences</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- In spite of 6- Because of
2- Altthough 7- In spite of
3- in spite of 8- because
4- although 9- because
5- because 10- although


<b>2. Exercise 4 </b>(Handout): <i>Rewrite the sentences in such a way that the </i>
<i>meaning is the same as the sentence given</i><b>.</b>


- Feedback and give correct answers


1. He said he had been watching TV when she had come.
2. She said they would have a holiday the next year.
3. He said I hadn’t gone to work the day before.



4. My mother asked me what I had done the day before.
5. She asked me how I got to school every day.


6. She asked me if I was reading her new stories.
7. She accused John of having breaking her car.
8. He apologisied to his teacher for being late.


9. Cakes were being made at this time yesterday by my mother.
10. I will be picked up at my house.


11. He is chosen the monitor by all the students.
12. A big house has just been bought.


13. Any fish couldn’t be caught by me.


14. These excercises have to be done at home by all the students.
15. It is said that he swims across this river.


He is said to swim across this river.


16. It is believed that the policemen saved many children from the fire.
The policemen are believed to have saved many children from the fire.
17. It is thought that she travels around the world.


She is thought to travel around the world.
18. Unless you really want it, don’t take this job.
19. Unless we are free, we won’t go to see you.


20. If I had studied carefully, I wouldn’t have made a lot of mistakes.
21. If they had had some time, they would have written to us.



22. Unless it stops snowing, we won’t get home.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

24. If he were a millionaire, he would buy you a palace.
25. If she didn’t eat too much, she wouldn’t be overweight.
26. We wish that factory had produced much pollution.
27. I wish we had watched that film last night.


28. He wishes he would go to university in England.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


-Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo excercises at home
- Prepair for the first term test.


<b>P.D:24.12.2009</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>53: </b>

<b>The first term test</b>



<b>T.D</b>
<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


-Check sts’ knowledge of English from unit 1 to unit 8.



- Assess sts’ in the first term so that the T can find out the suitable methods for her students


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Multiple choice test


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: pens


- Teacher: English paper test, topics and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T gives sts requirements
- T gives sts test papers
- Sts do the test individually


- T collect test papers.


<b>1. Topics: - </b>4 topics<i>(handouts)<b> </b></i>
<b>2. Mark levels and answer keys.</b>
<i><b>a,Mark levels</b></i>


- 0.25 point for each correct answer.


<i><b>b,Answer keys: Topic 279</b></i>


1- B 11- B 21- B 31- A
2- D 12- A 22- B 32- B
3- C 13- A 23- C 33- B
4- A 14- D 24- A 34- A
5- B 15- A 25- B 35- A
6- A 16- A 26- A 36- B
7- D 17- A 27- A 37- A
8- A 18- D 28- C 38- A
9- A 19- D 29- B 39- A
10- C 20- D 30- B 40- D


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

<b>P.D:25.12.2009</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>54: </b>

<b>paying back the first term test</b>



<b>T.D</b>


<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


- Paying English papers back to sts.


- Correcting common mistakes and giving remarks on the test so that sts can do the other test better.
- Giving answer keys.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


-


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: pens



- Teacher: English papers and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the test


- Sts compare with a partner
- T gives remarks on the test
- T gives answer keys
- T corrects common
mistakes


1- Paying back the English papers
2- Giving remarks on the test.


- Students: lazy and lack of knowledge
- Best part:



- Worst part :
- Best work:
- Worst work:


3- Correct common mistakes
-


-
-



<i><b>-IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo the test at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 9- A Reading


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>26.12.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>55: Unit 9: </b>

<b>deserts</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 1</b>

<b>: </b>

A - Reading


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

2. Education: - Knowing how to form deserts and what kinds of plants and animals can live in deserts.
3. Skills: Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>


<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts read through the
passage then find out new
words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T


- Sts study task 1 carefully


- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2 carefully


<b>1. Before you read (page 96)</b>


<i>* Answer the following questions</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


1- They are dry. There are few trees, few people and animals living in a
desert. There is litttle and no water, little rainfall.


2- The cactus and camel can live in a desert.
3- Australia, China ...


<i>* Presenting the new words</i>


- to stretch (v): kéo dài, trải dài
- to comprise (v): bao gồm
- aerial (a): trên không
- cactus (n): cây xơng rồng
- camel (n): con lạc đà



- expedition (n): cuộc thăm dò, thám hiểm
- dune (n): cồn cát, đụn cát


- crest (n): đỉnh, nóc, ngọn
- spinifex (n): cỏ lá nhọn (úc)
- corridor (n): hành lang
- slope (n): dốc, độ dốc
- shrubland (n):


<b>2. While you read (page 98)</b>
<i><b>a. Task 1 (page 98)</b></i>


<i>Give the Viettnamese equivalents to the following words or phrases</i>


- Feedback
1- stretch : kéo ra
2- sandy: có cát


3- aerial survey: trắc lượng trên không


4- Royal Geographical society of Australia: Hội địa lý hoàng gia Úc
5- Australian Aborigine: thổ dân Úc


6- dune: đụn cát


7- sloping: dốc thoai thoải
8- steep: dốc đứng, dốc ngược
9- hummock: gò, đống


10- crest: đỉnh



11- spinifex: cỏ lá nhọn


<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 98)</b></i>


<i>Decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

- Sts read the passage
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 3
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in groups
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


1- F (Three great stretches...) 4- F (Colson only)


2- F (No information) 5- F (short dunes)
3- T ( he named the desert ...) 6- T


<i><b>c. Task 3 (page 98)</b></i>


<i>Answer the following questions</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


1-They are Great Victoria Deserts, Gibbon, Great Sandy and Tanami
Deserts and Simpson Desert.


2- It lies between Lake Eyre in the south, the Macdonnel Ranges in the
north, the Mulligan and the Diamantina Rivers in the east, and the
Macumba and Finke Rivers in the west.


3- In 1845.


4- He was thr president of the South Australian Branch of the Royal
Geographical Society of Australia.


5- They took camels across the desert.


6- In the west part, they are short, mostly less than 10 metres high, and in
the northern part, they are parallel and are up to 20 metres high.


7- Two. They are hummock grasses and spinifex.


<b>3. After you read (page 99)</b>



<i>Read this story and asnwer the questions that follow.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested asnwers
1- Yes, it is.


2- It is: “desert” and “desert”
- desert (n) /’des:t/: sa mạc


- desert (n) /di’z:t/: món ăn tráng miệng


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice reading at home


- Do exercise part: Reading in workbook
- Prepare for the next period


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>29.12.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>56: Unit 9: </b>

<b>deserts</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 2</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>b - speaking</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Speaking about the features of the deserts: climate, plants, animals, people
2. Education: - Knowing more about the deserts.


3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Pair, group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1 st)


2- Read the passage then do task 2 (1 st)
3- Task 1 (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts find all new words
- T gives their meaning
- Sts practise the new words
after the T


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts work individually
- Sts compare with their
partners


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes



- Sts study task 2
- T explains task 2
- Sts work in pairs
- T goes around and help
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task 3
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Task 1(page 99)</b>


<i>Check the trees and animals that you think might exist in a desert. </i>
<i>Explain your choice.</i>


* Presenting new words:
- eucalyptus (n): cây bạch đàn
- date palm (n): cây trà là
- frog (n): con ếch


- lizard (n): con thằn lằn
* Feedback:



- cactus - date palm
- grass - camel
* Suggested answer:


I think cacti, date palms, some kinds of grasses and camels can exist in a
desert because they live with little water and camels can restore water in
their humps when they have to live for long days without finding water in
a desert.


<b>2. Task 2 (page 99)</b>


<i>Find out as many natural features of a desert as possible. Then compare </i>
<i>your notes with other pairs. Use the cues below..</i>


- Feedback


+ climate: hot, dry
+ rainfall: very low


+ plants/ trees: cacti, some kinds of trees such as palm trees
+ animals: very few, only camels


+ soil: sand


+ seasons: hot season (during the day)
cold season (during the night)


<b>3. Task 3 (page 99</b>


<i>Discuss and choose the five most important things you should bring </i>


<i>along with you. Explain your choice.</i>


- Feedback


1- I will bring water because there is little water in a desert and we may
die of lacking water.


2- I will bring a camel as the camel is the best means of transfort in a
desert.


3- I’ll bring food because it is almost impossible to find food in a desert.
4- I’ll bring a box of matches as there is no electricity in a desert.


5- I’ll bring a blanket as it is very cold at night in a desert.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice speaking at home


- Do exercise part: Speaking in workbook


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

<b>P.D:30.12.2009</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>57: Unit 9: </b>

<b>desert</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 3</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>C- listening</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Listening to an expert talking about deserts; what they are and how they are formed
then doing the tasks that follow.


2. Education: - Knowing more about deserts.
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>



- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Task 2 (1 st)
2- Task 3 (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- T gives new words


- T gives the meaning of the


new words


- Sts pronounce after T
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Before you listen (page 100)</b>


<i>* Ask and answer the following questions</i>


- Feedback and give a suggested answer
1- A desert is a hot, dry and sandy place.
2- Natural changes and human.


3- Yes, he can. Because he farms to make land dry and poor and they cut
down trees for wood.


<i>* Presenting new words</i>


- rabit (n): con thỏ
- cannal (n): kênh


- firewood (n): củi


<i>* Listen and repeat</i>


<b>2. While you listen (page 100 - 101)</b>
<i><b>a, Task 1 (page 100)</b></i>


<i>You will hear an expert talking about deserts, what they are and how </i>
<i>they are formed. Listen to his talk and decide whether the statements are </i>
<i>true (T) or false (F).</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- T


2- F (many of the plants have hard needles instead of leaves.)
3- T


4- F (human does, too)
5- T


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

- Sts study task 2 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes


- Sts work in groups
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<i>Listen again and answer the following questions.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers


1- It examines deserts, what they are and how they are formed.


2- It is a hot, dry and sandy place. It is also a beautiful land of silence and
space. The sun shines, the wind blows, and time and space seem endless.
3- Nature and humans.


4- They contribute by eating every plant they can find. This makes the
land become desert.


<i><b>c, Task 3 (page 101)</b></i>


<i>Listen to part of the expert’s talk again and fill in the missing word(s).</i>


- Feedback



1- 90 % 4- spreading
2- smaller plants 5- capital
3- prevent 6- canals


<b>3. After you listen (page 101)</b>


<i>.Summarise the main ideas of the expert’s talk. Use the following </i>
<i>suggestions.</i>


- Feedback and give suggestions
1- What is a desert?


2- What causes the growth of a desert?


3- What should humans do to prevent the growth of deserts?


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice listening at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 9 – D – Writing


<b>P.D:30.12.2009</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>58: Unit 9: </b>

<b>deserts</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 4</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>d - writing</b>




<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Writing a composition about the Sahara desert.
2. Education: - Knowing how to write a composition.


3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Individual and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks


- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, letters of examples


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4


12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- After you read (2 sts)


III. New lesson



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

- Sts study the task


-T explains the requirements
- T gives new words


- T explains the meanings
- Sts practice reading them


- Sts discuss in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- Sts write individually
- T calls sts to write their
writing on the green board
- T corrects mistakes
- T collects some writings



<i>Study the information in the table below and write composition about </i>
<i>Sahara Desert.</i>


<b>1. Guide to write</b>


* <i>Presenting new words</i>


- to extend (v): më réng


- arid land (n): đất khô cằn


- moisture (n): hơi ẩm
- oases (n): ốc đảo


- tableland (n): bỡnh nguyờn
- elevation (n): độ cao


- acacia (n): cây keo


- gazelle (n): linh dương gazen
- antelope (n): linh dương
- jackal (n): chó rừng


* Discuss the requirements
- Feedback


<b>2. Writing a composition about the Sahara Desert.</b>


- Feedback and give a suggested writing.



<i><b>The Sahara Desert</b></i>


The Sahara desert is the largest in the world. It has a total area of more
than 9,065,000 sq km with 1,610 km wide and about 5,150 km long from
the east to the west.


Located in northern Africa, it extends from the Atlantic ocean easterward
past the Red Sea to Iraq. It lies mostly in Moroco, Algeria, Tunisia,
Libya, Egypt, Mauritania, Mali, Niger and Sudan.


It is totally impossible to find moiture in the Sahara desert. The land is
arid and the climate is dry. It is very hot in Summer and very cold in
Winter. If you are in the desert you can see few oases exist there and all
spreads in front of you is sandy land and large dunes of sand. Its


tableland has average elevation from 400 to 500 m. There are a few farms
and animals and vegetable life. The main trees you can find there are
cactus, the date palm, and a form of acacia. The main animals you are
likely to see there are gazelle, antelope, fox, jackal and camel.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice writing at home


- Do exercise part: Writing in workbook



- Prepare for the next period: Unit 9 – E – Language focus


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>31.12.2009</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>59: Unit 9: </b>

<b>deserts</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 5</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>E </b>

<b> language focus</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Pronunciation: Full and contracted forms of auxiliaries
- Grammar: So, but, however and therefore


2. Education: - Comparing with Vietnamese
3. Skills: - Practical skills.



<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

- Individual, pair and the whole class work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- How to use <b>so, but, however and therefore</b>? Give examples


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T pronounces as a model
- T explains


- Sts listen to the disk twice


- Sts practice


- T reviews grammar notes
- Sts answer questions: How
to use <b>so, but, however and</b>
<b>therefore</b>?


- Sts give examples


- Sts study exercise 1
- Sts work individually
- Sts compare with their
partner


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study exercise 2
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study exercise 3
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Pronunciation(page 103) : </b><i>Full and contracted forms of auxiliaries </i>
<i>(continued)</i>


<i><b>a, Read the following phrases (page 103)</b></i>
<i><b>b, Practice reading these sentences (page 103)</b></i>


<b>2. Grammar (page 103 - 105): </b><i>So, but, however and therefore</i>
<i>* But</i>: used before a word, a phrase or a clause (contrast meaning)
Eg: She works hard but she is paid less.


* <i>However: </i>used before a contrast sentence. (Normally use comma after)
Eg: We thought we were right. However, we have discovered we were
wrong.


<i>* So:</i> - for a reason


Eg: I felt sleepy so I went to bed.
- for a result


Eg: We worked hard so we earned much money.
- for a purpose


Eg: I talked to her so I knew it.


<i>* Therefore</i>: - for a cause


Eg: He is only 16 years old and therefore he doesn’t drive



<b>3. Doing exercises</b>


<i><b>a, Exercise 1 (page 103-104)</b></i>


<i>Add </i><b>so</b><i> or </i><b>but</b><i> and a comma where appropriate</i><b>.</b>


- Feedback and give correct answers


1- so 3- so 5- so 7- but
2- but 4- but 6- but 8- so


<i><b>b, Exercise 2 (page 104)</b></i>


<i>Underline the correct alternative in the following sentences.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- but 3- yet 5- but 7- however
2- however 4- so 6- however 8- but


<i><b>c, Exercise 3 (page 105)</b></i>


<i>Add </i><b>so, therefore</b><i> or </i><b>however</b><i> where appropriate.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- therefore 3- so 5- However 7- so
2- so 4- therefore 6- therefore 8- however



<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

- Prepare for the next period


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>02.01.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>60: Unit 10: </b>

<b>Endangered species</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 1</b>

<b>: </b>

A - Reading


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>



<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: Reading a passage about endangered species then doing the tasks
2. Education: - being aware of protecting endangered species and our environment.
3. Skills: Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Exercise 1 (1 st)
2- Exercise 2 (1 st)
3- Exercise 3 (1 st)



III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts read through the
passage then find out new
words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Before you read (page 106)</b>



<i>* Look at the pictures and answer the questions</i>


- Feedback


a, tortoise d, elephant g, mosquito
b, monkey f, frog h, parrot


<i>* Presenting the new words</i>


- exploitation (n): sù khai th¸c
- leopard (n): con b¸o


- rhinoceros (n): con tê giác
- urbanization (n): sự đơ thị hố
- vulnerable (a): dễ bị tổn thơng
- to classcify (v): phân loại
- hatbitat (n): môi trờng sống
<b>2. While you read (page 107-109)</b>
<i><b>a. Task 1 (page 108)</b></i>


<i>The noun in column A all apprear in the passage. Match each of them </i>
<i>with a suitable definition in column B.</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers
1- c 3- a
2- d 4- b


<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 108-109)</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

- Sts study task 2 carefully


- Sts read the passage
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 3
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in groups
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Feedback and give correct answers
1- D 4- A
2- B 5- D
3- A


<i><b>c. Task 3 (page 109)</b></i>


<i>Find evidence in the passage to support these statements.</i>



- Feedback and give answers
1-Sentence 1 – paragraph 2
2- Paragraph 3


3- paragraph 4


<b>3. After you read (page 109)</b>


<i>Summarize the reading passage by writing ONE sentence for each </i>
<i>paragraph.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested asnwers


1- Over 15 thousand plant and animal species all over the world are
threatened with extinction.


2- The main causes of species extinction are habitat destruction,
commercial exploitation and pollution.


3- Biodiversity is important for humans as it provides.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice reading at home



- Do exercise part: Reading in workbook
- Prepare for the next period


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>14.01.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>61: Unit 10: </b>

<b>endangered species</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 2</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>b - speaking</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Speaking about endagered animals


2. Education: - Being aware of the role of the balance of habitat and preserve it.
3. Skills: - Practical skills.



<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Pair, group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1 st)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

3- Read the passage, then do AFTER YOU READ (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts work in pairs



- Sts compare with other
pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2
- T explains task 2
- Sts work in pairs
- T goes around and help
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task 3
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Task 1(page 109)</b>


<i>Ask and answer the following questions</i>



- Feedback:


1- We call Gấu Trúc Panda, Tê Giác Rhino, Hổ Tiger, Voi Elephant in
English.


2- Each of them lives in the forest.


3- Panda can be used as a pet, rhino and tiger as medicine ,elephant as
food.


4- All of them are endangered.
<b>2. Task 2 (page 110)</b>


<i>Look at the information about the giant panda, tiger, rhino and elephant,</i>
<i>which are endangered animals. Ask and answer questions about them.</i>


- Feedback
* Giant panda


A: Where do giant pandas live?


B: In bamboo forests in the mountains in the central and western China.
A: What is the population of pandas in the world?


B: Only about 600.
A: How high is it?


B: It’s from 1.2 to 1.5 m high.
A: How much does it weigh?
B: It weighs from 75 to 160 kg.


A: What does it eat?


B: It eats bamboo.
A: How long can it live:


B: It can live about 20 to 30 years.
A: Why are giant pandas endangered?


B: They are endangered because of habitat destruction and illegal trading
...


<b>3. Task 3 (page 110)</b>


<i>Take turns to give an oral report on the animals mentioned in Task 2.</i>


- Feedback
* Giant pandas


Giant pandas live in bamboo forests in the mountains in the central and
western China. The population of giant pandas is only about 600. A giant
panda is from 1.2 to 1.5 m high. It weighs from 75 to 160 kg. Giant
pandas eat bamboo. This kind of animals eats grass and plants. They can
live as long as 30 years. They are endangered because of habitat


destruction and illegal trade.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points



<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice speaking at home


- Do exercise part: Speaking in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 10– C- Listening


<b>P.D:15.01. 2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>62: Unit 10: </b>

<b>endangered species</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 3</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>C- listening</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>3</b></i> <i><b>4</b></i> <i><b>5</b></i> <i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Listening to the passage about a golilla then doing the tasks that follow.
2. Education: - Knowing more about endangered species.


3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>



- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Task 3 (2 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- T gives new words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words



- Sts pronounce after T
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes
- Sts work in groups


<b>1. Before you listen (page 111)</b>


<i>* Discuss and choose the best answer A, B or C.</i>


- Feedback and give a suggested answer



1- C 2-B 3- C


<i>* Presenting new words</i>


- bared teeth (n): răng hở
- gorilla (n): khỉ đột


- sociable (a): dễ gần, hoà đồng
- silverback (n): lng trắng bạc
- sub-adult (n):


- nest (n): tỉ


- worm (n): giun, s©u
<i>* Listen and repeat</i>


<b>2. While you listen (page 111-112)</b>
<i><b>a, Task 1 (page 111)</b></i>


<i>Listen to the passage and choose the best answer A, B, C or D to each </i>
<i>question.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- A 4- C
2- B 5- D
3- D


<i><b>b, Task 2 (page 112)</b></i>


<i>Listen again and complete the chart below.</i>



- Feedback and give the suggested answers
1- peaceful 5- in trees
2- plant-eating 6- in grasses
3- a few females and their young 7- civil wars


4- plants and a few insects 8- forests being cut down


<b>3. After you listen (page 101)</b>


<i>.Summarise the main ideas of the passage, using the information and the </i>
<i>answers in Task 1 and 2.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


...


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice listening at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 10 – D – Writing



<b>P.D:20.01.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>63: Unit 10: </b>

<b>endangered species</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 4</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>d - writing</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Writing a paragraph about measures of protecting endangered animals
2. Education: - Being aware of the importance of the balance of habitat.


3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Individual and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks


- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, letters of examples


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>



- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1 st)
2- After you listen (1 sts)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task


-T explains the requirements
- Sts discuss in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Task 1: (page 113)</b>


<i>Suggest possible measures that should be taken to solve the following </i>
<i>problems.</i>



- Feedback


1- Sollution: There should be programs to raise people’s awareness of the
need to protect rare and endangered animals. These should be


competitions in school about this issue.


2- Sollution: We should ask other non-governmental organizations and
individuals to sponsor by advertising them on mass media.


3- Sollution: There should be programs to ... in school about this issue.
4- Sollution: Encourage them to do something else to have more benefit
like producing something in their area.


5- Sollution: Conferences should be held with the participation of these
countries to raise their awareness and supply them with some ideas other
countries have taken.


6- Sollution: There should be campaigns to ask people not to use these
products and make them feel guilty to use them.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- Sts write individually
- T calls sts to write their
writing on the green board
- T corrects mistakes
- T collects some writings



to help. A part from that, in some countries they make these places
interestint enough for tourists to go there.


<b>2. Taks 2 (page 113)</b>


<i>Writte a paragraph about measure for protecting endangered animals </i>
<i>using the ideas discussed in Task 1. </i>


- Feedback and give a suggested writing.


There are a number of measures that should be taken to protect
endangered animals.First of all, there should be programs to raise
people’s awareness of the need to protect rare and endangered animals.
There should be competitions in school about this issue. One thing we
can do is ask other governmental organizations and individuals to


sponsor by advertising them om mass media. In places where people rely
mostly on wildlife products for their living, we can encourage them to do
something else to have more benefit like producing something in their
area. Moreover, conferences should be held with the participation of the
counrties which donot have laws to protect endangered animals to raise
their awareness and supply them with some ideas other countries have
taken. With those who keep buying fashionable wildlife products, we can
ask them not to use these prodicts by making them feel guilty to use
them. Last but not least, the governments should spend time establishing
more wildlife habitat reserves. The government can ask other


organizations to help. We can see that in some countries they make these
places interesting enough for tourists to go there.



<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice writing at home


- Do exercise part: Writing in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 10 – E – Language focus


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>21.01.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>64: Unit 10: </b>

<b>endangered species</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 5</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>E </b>

<b> language focus</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>


<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Pronunciation: rhythm


- Grammar: Modal verbs: <b>may, might, must, mustn’t, needn’t</b>


2. Education: - Comparing with Vietnamese
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Individual, pair and the whole class work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Collect 3 writings to give marks.



III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T pronounces as a model
- T explains


- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts practice


- T reviews grammar notes
- Sts answer questions: How
to use these modal verbs:


<b>may, might, must, mustn’t,</b>
<b>needn’t</b>?


- Sts give examples


- Sts study exercise 1
- Sts work individually
- Sts compare with their
partner


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study exercise 2


- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study exercise 3
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Pronunciation(page 114) : </b><i>Rhythm</i>


<i><b>a, Read the following phrases (page 114)</b></i>
<i><b>b, Practice reading these sentences (page 114)</b></i>
<b>2. Grammar (page 114 - 115): </b><i>Modal verbs: </i>


<i> MAY, MIGHT, MUST, MUSTN’T, NEEDN’T</i>
<i>* May</i>: - possible activities


Eg: She may understand this and help you.
- for permission


Eg: May I come in?
- for wishes


Eg: May you have merry Christmas.


May you be healthy and happy.


* <i>Might:: </i>- past form of MAY in the reported speech.
Eg: He said he might come there tomorrow.


- possible activities


Eg: He might get there on time.
- for polite request


Eg: You might try doing it again.
- for polite permission


Eg; Might I use your phone?


<i>* Must:</i> - for obligation
Eg: You must finish it in time.


<i>* Mustn’t</i>: - for banning
Eg: You mustn’t talk in class.
You mustn’t smoke in public.


<i>* Needn’t:</i> - for no need


Eg: You needn’t clean the house again.


<b>3. Doing exercises</b>


<i><b>a, Exercise 1 (page 114-115)</b></i>



<i>Complete the sentences, using <b>may/ might </b>with one of the verbs in the </i>
<i>box.</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers


2- may/ might wake 5- may/ might slip
3- may/ might bite 6- may/ might break
4- may/ might need


<i><b>b, Exercise 2 (page 115)</b></i>


<i>Complete the sentences, using <b>needn’t</b> with one of the verbs in the box</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


2- needn’t come 5- needn’t tell
3- needn’t walk 6- needn’t explain
4- needn’t ask


<i><b>c, Exercise 3 (page 115)</b></i>


<i>Complete the sentences with <b>must, mustn’t </b>or<b> needn’t.</b></i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
3- needn’t 6- needn’t
4- must 7- needn’t


5- mustn’t 8- must / mustn’t


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

- Summarize the main points



<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home


- Do exercises in workbook – part: Language focus
- Prepare for the next period


<b>P.D:25.01.2010 </b>

<b>§</b>

<b>65: </b>

<b>test yourself d</b>



<b>T.D: </b>
<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>



1. Knowledge: - Sts check themselves the knowledge of English they have learnt in the two latest units
(unit 9 – unit 10).


2. Education: - Comparing to Vietnamese.
3. Skills: - practical skills


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Testing yourself


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (15 minute test)</b></i>


1. Give topics: two topics (handouts)
2. Answer keys and mark levels
* Topic 1:


I. 1- so 2- but 3- but 4- so 5- but


II. 1- needn’t 2- needn’t 3- mustn’t 4- mustn’t 5- needn’t
* Topic 2:


I. 1- so 2- so 3- but 4- but 5- so
II. 1- mustn’t 2- needn’t 3- needn’t 4- mustn’t 5- needn’t


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task


- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts do the task individually
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
carefully


- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about


<b>1. Listening (page 116) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i>Listen to the passage and complete the note with NO MORE THAN </i>
<i>THREE words..</i>



- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- bamboo shoots, leaves 4- half


2- 12 5- cloning (the panda)
3- 600


<b>2. Reading (page 116) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i>Read the passage and decide whether the following statements are true </i>
<i>(T) or false (F) or not mentioned (NM)..</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- T corrects mistakes
- Sts work individually
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T collects and corrects
some writings


3- T (a huge decline in the number of elephants)
4- T (in small number of countries)


5- T (poachers severe punishments)


<b>3. Grammar (page 117) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i>Complete the sentences with <b>must, mustn’t </b>or <b>needn’t</b></i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- needn’t; must; mustn’t 5- mustn’t
2- mustn’t 6- mustn’t
3- needn’t; must 7- needn’t
4- mustn’t


<b>4. Writing (page 117) (2.5 points) – At home</b>


<i>Study the information about the rhino then write a paragraph describing </i>
<i>the animal and suggest possible solutions to protect it from extinct.</i>


* Suggestions



- The rhino lives...
- The population of the rhino is ...
- It is ... high.


- It weighs ...
- The rhino eats ...
- The rhino can live ...
- The rhino is in danger of becoming extinct because of ...
* Mark levels


- Structures: 1 point
- Content: 0.5 point
- Vocabulary: 1 point


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home
- Revise for the next period.


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>26.01.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>66: Unit 11: </b>

<b>books</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 1</b>

<b>: </b>

A - Reading


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: Reading a passage about how to read a book then doing the tasks
2. Education: - being aware of the role of reading then taking a habit of reading.
3. Skills: Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan



<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (no)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts read through the
passage then find out new
words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T


- Sts study task 1 carefully


- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 3
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps



<b>1. Before you read (page 118)</b>


<i>* Ask and answer the following questions</i>


1- Do you often read books?


2- What kind of books do you enjoy readign most/ least?
3- How do you read books?


- Feedback


<i>* Presenting the new words</i>


- to chew(v): nhai (đọc nghiền ngẫm)
- to digest (v): tiêu hóa (đọc và suy ngẫm)
- to swallow (v): nuốt chửng (đọc ngấu nghiến)
- to dip into (v): đọc qua loa


- to taste (v): nếm (đọc qua)


- hard-to-pick-up-again: khó có thể cầm lên lại đợc
- hard-to-put-it-down: không thể đặt xuống


<b>2. While you read (page 120)</b>
<i><b>a. Task 1 (page 120)</b></i>


<i>The following words and phrases all appear in the passage. Find the </i>
<i>Vietnamese equivalent for each of them.</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers


1- swallow : đọc ngấu nghiến
2- dip into: đọc qua loa
3- taste: đọc qua


4- “hard-to-pick-up-again”: khó có thể cầm lên lại đợc
5- digest: đọc và suy ngẫm


6- chew: đọc nghiền ngẫm


7- “hard-to-put-it-down”: không thể đặt xuống đợc
<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 120)</b></i>


<i>Decide whether the following statements are true (T), false (F) or not </i>
<i>mentioned (NM) in the reading passage. Tick the appropriate box.</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers
1- NM 4- T


2- F (dip into...) 5- F (hasnot killed)
3- NM


<i><b>c. Task 3 (page 120)</b></i>


<i>Answer the questions according to the information in the passage.</i>


- Feedback and give answers
1- Three.


2- When you find a good story and have time to enjoy it.



3- Read a few passages to see if it’s the one you can easily read and
understand./ Check that it isn’t too difficult.


4- Television can bring you all the information and stories with colour
picture and action.


5- Books are still a cheap way to get information and entertainment; you
can keep a book forever and read it many times.


<b>3. After you read (page 121)</b>


<i>Find the names of types of books in the square. The words may go across</i>
<i>(</i><i>), down (</i><i>), up (</i><i>), backwards (</i><i>),or at an angle. Here are some </i>


<i>clues.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested asnwers


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice reading at home


- Do exercise part: Reading in workbook


- Prepare for the next period


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>29.01.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>67: Unit 11: </b>

<b>books</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 2</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>b - speaking</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering about the other’s reading habits and about the books they read.
2. Education: - Taking the habits of reading.


3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>



- Presentation and practice
- Pair, group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1 st)


2- Read the passage then do task 2 (1 st)
3- Read the passage, then do task 3 (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts work in pairs



- Sts compare with other
pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2
- T explains task 2
- Sts work in pairs
- T goes around and help
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task 3


<b>1. Task 1(page 122)</b>


<i>Complete the conversation and practice reading it.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggestion


<i><b>Conversation 1: </b></i>


A: What sorts of books do you like reading?
A: How do you often read books?


A: When do you often read books?



<b>2. Task 2 (page 122)</b>


<i>Ask and answer about each other’s reading habits, using the questions in</i>
<i>the conversation.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggestion


B: Well, I like reading all sorts of books especially short stories,
science...


B: I taste the book first. Then I digest it.
B: I read books before I go to bed.


<b>3. Task 3 (page 122)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task 4
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task 5
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Feedback and give the suggestion


<i><b>Conversation 2:</b></i>


A: What are you reading at the moment?
A: Who is the main character?


A: What is he like?


<b>4. Task 4 (page 122)</b>


<i>Ask and answer about the book you are reading or you have read. Note </i>
<i>down the answers.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggestion


B: At the moment? Well, I’m reading the short story of Picked Wife,
written by Kim Lan.


B: The main character? A young man, Chang, who is very poor, urgly


and has an old mother. They lived in a small village.


B: He is very kind to orther people.


<b>5. Task 5 (page 122)</b>


<i>Report the results to the group.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggestion


I like reading all sort of books especially short stories, science ...
Whenever I have a book, I taste it at first, then I digest it. I often read
books before I go to bed.At the moment, I am reading the short story of
Picked Wife, written by Kim Lan. The mani character is a young man,
Chang, who is very poor and urgly man. He has an old mother. They live
together in a small village.They are very kind to other people.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice speaking at home


- Do exercise part: Speaking in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 11– C- Listening


<b>P.D:30.01. 2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>68: Unit 11: </b>

<b>books</b>




<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 3</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>C- listening</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Listening to a talk about the book that she has just read then doing the tasks that follow.
2. Education: - Teaching how to take up a habit of reading.


3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting



- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

1- Task 5 (2 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- T gives new words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Before you listen (page 123)</b>


<i>* Your partner has just read an interesting book. What questions do you </i>
<i>ask him/ her to find out as much as possible about the book?.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested questions
1- What is the title of the book?


2- Who is the author?



3- Who is/ are the main character(s)?
4- Where is the book set?


...


<i>* Presenting new words</i>


- incredible (a): không thể tin đợc
- wilderness (n): vùng hoang dã
- personality (n): tính cách
- fascinating (a): hấp dn
- reunite (v): on t


- unnoticed (a): không bị nhận ra
<i>* Listen and repeat</i>


<b>2. While you listen (page 123-124)</b>
<i><b>a, Task 1 (page 123)</b></i>


<i>Circle the correst answer A, B or C.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- B 4- A
2- C 5- A
3- B


<i><b>b, Task 2 (page 124)</b></i>


<i>Listen again and fill in the gaps in the passage.</i>



- Feedback and give the suggested answers
1- family 4- journey
2- strength 5- pet
3- humans


<b>3. After you listen (page 124)</b>


<i>Ask and answer the question: Would you like to read the book or </i>
<i>wouldn’t you? Why/ Why not?</i>


- Feedback and give suggestions


I would like to read the book because I want to know about animals’ life.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice listening at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 11 – D – Writing


<b>P.D:31.01.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>69: Unit 11: </b>

<b>books</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 4</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>d - writing</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>



<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

2. Education: - Teaching sts how to write a report on a book.
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Individual, pair and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks


- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, letters of examples


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1 st)


2- After you listen (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task


-T explains the requirements
- Sts discuss in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task


-T explains the requirements
- Sts discuss in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Task 1: (page 124-125)</b>



<i>Below are questions you have to answer when writing a report on a </i>
<i>book, but they are jumped. Put the questions under the correct headings.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggestion
<i><b>General introduction</b></i>


7- What is the title of the book?
4- Who is the author?


9- What type of book is it?
<i><b>Summary of the book s content</b></i>’
2- Where is the book set?


5- What is the main theme of the story/
6- Who are the main characters?
8- What is the plot of the story?
<i><b>Conclusion</b></i>


1- What was your opinion of the book?
3- Would you recommend the book?
<b>2. Taks 2 (page 125)</b>


<i>Ask and asnwer the questions about a book you have just read. </i>


- Feedback and give suggestions.


7- The title of the book is “A picked wife”.
4- It was written by Kim Lan.


9- It is a short story.



2- It is set in the countryside in the northern part of Vietnam.


5- The main theme of the story is about the value of the humanism and
the terrible famine and the real picture of Vitenamese society about the
famine. However, people desire to live and hope in the good future and
believe in the role of leading of the Vietnamese party and government.
6- The main character is a young poor man, Trang, who lives with an old
mother. He is very urgly, hardworking and very kind to other people.
8- The story denotes the Vietnamese famine in 1945 and in that situation,
Trang picked a wife, a poor and urgly woman. That means he helps one
person, save one person. It denotes the real value of the humanism.
1- I think it is a good story. It makes the relationship among people more
friendly and lovely.


3- I would recommend the book to anyone who loves the good
relationships among people.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- Sts write individually
- T calls sts to write their
writing on the green board
- T corrects mistakes
- T collects some writings


<i>Write a report on the book you have read.</i>


- Feedback and give a suggested writing.



I have read a very good story of “A Picked Wife”, written by Kim Lan. It
is set in the countryside in the Northern part of Vietnam.


The main theme of the story is about the value of the humanism, the
terrible famine and the real picture of Vietnamese society about the
famine. However, people desire to live and hope in the good future and
believe in the role of leading of the Vietnamese party and government.
The main character is a young poor man, Trang, who lives with an old
mother. He is very urgly, hardworking and very kind to other people. The
story denotes the Vietnamese famine in 1945 and in that situation, Trang
picked a wife, a poor and urgly woman. That means he helps one person,
save one person. It denotes the real value of the humanism.


I think it is a good story. It makes the relationship among people more
friendly and lovely. I would recommend the book to anyone who loves
the good relationships among people.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice writing at home


- Do exercise part: Writing in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 11 – E – Language focus


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>21.01.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>70: Unit 11: </b>

<b>books</b>




<b>T.D:... </b>

<b>Period 5</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>E </b>

<b> language focus</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Pronunciation: rhythm


- Grammar: Modal verbs in the passive voice.
2. Education: - Comparing with Vietnamese


3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>



- Presentation and practice


- Individual, pair and the whole class work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Collect 3 writings to give marks.


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T pronounces as a model
- T explains


- Sts listen to the disk twice



<b>1. Pronunciation(page 126) : Rhythm</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

- Sts practise in turns


- T reviews grammar notes
- Sts answer questions: How
to form and use the passive
voice?


- Sts give examples


- Sts study exercise 1
- Sts work individually
- Sts compare with their
partner


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study exercise 2
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<i>b, Mark the primary stress over the main stress syllables, then practise </i>


<i>reading the sentences. (page 126)</i>


<b>2. Grammar (page 103 - 105): Modal verbs in the passive voice</b>


<b>Active Passive</b>


<i><b> S + M + V + O S + M + be + Vp2 + by O</b></i>


Eg: They can do that work.  That work can be done.


He must finish the project.  The project must be finished.


<i><b> S + M + have +Vp2 + O S + M + have + been + Vp2 + by O</b></i>


Eg: They could have met her.  She could have been met.


You would have broken your leg.  Your leg would have been broken


by you.


<b>3. Doing exercises</b>


<i><b>a, Exercise 1 (page 126-127)</b></i>


<i>Rewrite the sentences in the passive.</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers


1- This machine mustn’t be used by you after 5.30 P.M.
2- This machine must be cleaned by you every time you use it.


3- The flowers should be kept in a warm sunny place.


4- Your bill should be paid before you leave the hotel
5- We should be given the information now.


6- Toothpaste can be bought at the drug store.


7- The children should be warned by us not to speak to strangers.
8- The mystery can’t be solved.


9- Travellers’ cheques can be exchanged at most banks.
10- She shouldn’t be told the new. It might kill her.


<i><b>b, Exercise 2 (page 127)</b></i>


<i>Following is a conversation between two characters in a science fiction </i>
<i>about space travel. Complete it with the suitable passive form of the </i>
<i>verbs in brackets.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- will be prepared 5- should food be chosen...?
2- Is food going to be cooked...? 6- has to be offered


3- will be pre-packed 7- could be selected
4- can be warmed 8- ought to be made


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points



<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home


- Do exercises in workbook – part: Language focus
- Prepare for the one period test


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>05.02.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>71: </b>

<b>The one period test</b>



<b>T.D: </b>...


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


-Check sts’ knowledge of English from unit 9 to unit 11.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- writing test


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

- Students: pens


- Teacher: English paper test, topics and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>


<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T gives sts requirements
- T gives sts test papers
- Sts do the test individually
- T collect test papers.


<b>1. Topics: - </b>4 topics<i>(handouts)<b> </b></i>
<b>2. Mark levels and answer keys.</b>
<i><b>*Topic 01</b></i>


<i>I. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. A 2. C 3. B 4. B 5. A


<i>II. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. B 2. B 3. C 4. C 5. D
6. B 7. D 8. C 9. C 10. C


11. A 12. A 13. D 14. D 15. D
16. A 17. A 18. A 19. A 20. A


<i>III. 0.5 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. A 2. C 3. B 4. A 5. C


<i>IV. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. D 2. C 3. B 4. B 5. C


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo the test at home


<b>P.D:06.02.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>72: </b>

<b>paying back the one period test</b>



<b>T.D: </b>...


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>



- Paying English papers back to sts.


- Correcting common mistakes and giving remarks on the test so that sts can do the other test better.
- Giving answer keys.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- presentation


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: pens


- Teacher: English papers and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

- Sts study the test


- Sts compare with a partner


- T gives remarks on the test
- T gives answer keys
- T corrects common
mistakes


1- Paying back the English papers
2- Giving remarks on the test.


- Students: lazy and lack of knowledge
- Best part:


- Worst part :
- Best work:
- Worst work:


3- Correct common mistakes
-


-
-



<i><b>-IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo the test at home



- Prepare for the next period: Unit 12- A: Reading


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>13.02.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>73: Unit 12: </b>

<b>water sports</b>



<b>T.D:... </b>

<b>Period 1</b>

<b>: </b>

A - Reading


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: Reading a passage about water polo – one type of water sports then doing the tasks
2. Education: - Teaching sts to take a habit of doing exercise.


3. Skills: Practical skills.



<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (no)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Before you read (page 128)</b>


<i>* Look at the picture and answer the questions.</i>


- Feedback


1- Yes, I can. It can be called water polo.
2- It is played in water.


3- They play it in groups.


<i>* Presenting the new words</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

- Sts read through the
passage then find out new
words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 3
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in groups
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- goalie (n): thđ m«n


- sprint for (v): chạy nớc rút
- defensive (a): phòng thủ
- opponent (n): đối thủ
- penalize (v): phạt


- eject (v): đẩy ra, tống ra
- punch (v): đấm


- range (v): s¾p xÕp


<b>2. While you read (page 130)</b>
<i><b>a. Task 1 (page 130)</b></i>


<i>Match the words in column A with their meanings in column B.</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers


1- e 2- c 3- a
4- b 5- d


<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 130)</b></i>


<i>Complete the following sentences, using the information from the </i>
<i>passage.</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers
1- 1.8 / 30 metres / 20 metres


2- white caps / blue caps / red caps with the number 1 in white.
3- their own goal lines


4- holding or punching the ball
5- five to eight minutes


<i><b>c. Task 3 (page 130)</b></i>



<i>Ask and answer the following questions.</i>


- Feedback and give answers
1- People can play it in a pool.
2- It is in the center of the pool.


3- The ball can be advanced by passing with one hand or swimming with
the head above the water and the ball between the arms so it rides on the
wave created by the swimmer’s head.


4- Only the goalie can hold the ball with both hands.


5- The player is ejected after committing five personal fouls.


<b>3. After you read (page 130)</b>


<i>Make a comparison between football and water polo, using the following</i>
<i>suggeestions.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested asnwers


<i><b>Feature Football Water polo</b></i>


Places to play in a stadium in a pool
Number of players 11 7
Length of game 90 minutes 5- 8 minutes


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>



- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice reading at home


- Do exercise part: Reading in workbook
- Prepare for the next period


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>20.02.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>74: Unit 12: </b>

<b>water sports</b>



<b>T.D:... </b>

<b>Period 2</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>b - speaking</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Speaking about some types of water sports.



2. Education: - Teaching sts to know about some types of water sports.
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Pair, group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1 st)


2- Read the passage then do task 2 (1 st)
3- Read the passage, then do task 3 (1 st)


III. New lesson




<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts look through tasks and
find out new words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts practise reading after T
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts work in pairs


- Sts compare with other
pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2
- T explains task 2
- Sts work in pairs
- T goes around and help
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task 3


- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps


<b>1. Task 1(page 131)</b>


<i>Look at the pictures and match the names with the appropriate water </i>
<i>sports.</i>


<i><b>* Presenting new words</b></i>


- scuba-diving (n): lặn có bình khí
- rowing (n): đua thuyền


- windsurfing (n): lớt ván buồm


- synchronized swimming (n): bơi nghệ thuật
- oar (n): mái chèo


- air tank (n): bình khí
- mask (n): mặt nạ
- fin (n): vây cá


<i><b>* Feedback and give the suggestion</b></i>


1- swimming 4- scuba-diving


2- windsurfing 5- synchronized swimming
3- water polo 6- rowing


<b>2. Task 2 (page 131)</b>



<i>Look at the table and talk about each of the water sports.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggestion


Eg: Water polo is played in a pool. It is played with a ball and people
play it in a team.


2- Rowing is played in a sea, lake or a river. It is played with a boat and
oars. People play it in a team or individually.


3- Windsurfing is played in a sea or a lake. It is played with a board and a
sail and people play it individually.


4- Scuba-diving is played in a sea. It is played with an air tank, a


regulator, a wet suit, a mask and fins. People play it in pairs or in a team.


<b>3. Task 3 (page 132)</b>


<i>Discuss the question: Which of the above sports would you prefer </i>
<i>playing/ participating in? Explain why.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


Eg: I prefer scuba-diving to water polo because it is adventurous.
However, it can be dangerous because you can easily be attacked by


sharks.


...


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice speaking at home


- Do exercise part: Speaking in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 12– C- Listening


<b>P.D:22.02. 2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>75: Unit 12: </b>

<b>water polo</b>



<b>T.D:... </b>

<b>Period 3</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>C- listening</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>


<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Listening to a talk about one water sport – synchronized swimming then doing the tasks
that follow.


2. Education: - Teaching sts to love sports and take habits to do exercises
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, the whole class and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting



- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Task 2 (1 st)
2- Task 3 (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts listen to the disk and
repeat twice


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work individually


<b>1. Before you listen (page 132)</b>


<i>* Look at the picture and discuss in groups whether this water sport is </i>


<i>played</i>


- Feedback


+ It is played: - in a swimming pool.
- without equipment.
- in a team or individually


<i>* Listen and repeat</i>


<b>2. While you listen (page 133-134)</b>
<i><b>a, Task 1 (page 133)</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes
- Sts work in groups


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- B 4- B
2- C 5- A
3- A


<i><b>b, Task 2 (page 134)</b></i>


<i>Listen again and answer the questions</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers


1- The great Australian swimmer, Annette Kellerman did.
2- She founded a water ballet club in 1923.


3- Curtis did.


4- They were conducted in 1946.


5- It became an Olympic event in 1984.


<b>3. After you listen (page 134)</b>


<i>Talk about the history of synchronized swimming, using the cues below.</i>



- Feedback and give suggestions


1- It was first performed in a glass tank in 1907.


2- In 1923, Katherine Cutis, founded a water ballet club.


3- In 1946, the first formal national championships were conducted by
the AAU.


4- In 1984, it became an Olympic event at the Los Angeles Games.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice listening at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 12 – D – Writing


<b>P.D:28.02.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>76: Unit 12: </b>

<b>water sports</b>



<b>T.D:... </b>

<b>Period 4</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>d - writing</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Giving instructions for one warm-up exercise before playing one type of water sports.
2. Education: - Knowing how to give instructions.


3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Individual, pair and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks


- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, letters of examples


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>


<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Talk about the history of synchronized swimming. (After you listen) – 2 sts


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

- Sts study the task


-T explains the requirements
- Sts discuss in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- Sts write individually
- T calls sts to write their


writing on the green board
- T corrects mistakes
- T collects some writings


<i>Below are the instructions for warm-up exercises before swimming. Read</i>
<i>and match each sentence with one appropriate action. Zero has been </i>
<i>done as an example.</i>


<i>* Presenting new words</i>


- bend (v): cói xuèng
- touch (v): chạm vào


- horizontally (adv): nằm ngang
* Guiding to write instructions
- Use imperative sentences


Eg: Set yourself in vertical position.


- Use linking words: first, next, then, after that, ...., finally
* Feedback


a- 2 c- 1
b- 4 d- 3
<b>2. Taks 2 (page 135)</b>


<i>Look at the pictures below. Write the instructions for one warm-up </i>
<i>exercise before playing water polo. Use the verbs in the box.</i>


- Feedback and give suggestions.


1- Set yourself in vertical position.


2- Stand with your feet apart, raise your hands above your head.
3- Bend forward, fingertips touch the ground.


4- Then bend again, fingertips touch the ground between the feet.
5- Finally, put each arm back to the first position.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice writing at home


- Do exercise part: Writing in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 12 – E – Language focus


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>01.03.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>77: Unit 12: </b>

<b>water sports</b>



<b>T.D:... </b>

<b>Period 5</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>E </b>

<b> language focus</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Pronunciation: Elision


- Grammar: Transitive and intransitive verbs.
2. Education: - Comparing with Vietnamese


3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Individual, pair and the whole class work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan



<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


<i>Can you change all these sentences into the passive? Why and why not?</i>


1- She gave me a book.
2- The baby is sleeping.
3- He can run very fast.


4- People are building a new school here.


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T pronounces as a model
- T explains elision


- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts practise in turns


- T reviews grammar notes
- Sts answer questions: How
to recognize transitive and
intransitive verbs?



- Sts give examples


- Sts study exercise 1
- Sts work pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study exercise 2
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study exercise 3
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Pronunciation(page 136) : Elision</b>


<i>a, Listen and repeat (page 136)</i>


<i>b, Practise reading these sentences. (page 136)</i>



<b>2. Grammar (page 136 - 137): Transitive and intransitive verbs</b>


<i>a, Transitive verbs: Verbs + Object</i>


Eg: I’m reading a book.


She bought these bags yesterday.


<i>b, Intransitive verbs: Verbs without object</i>


Eg: She can run fast.
The child is sleeping.


<i>* Notes: </i>Some verbs are both transitive and intransitive such as: open,
break, win....


Eg: Someone opened the door.
The door opened.


<b>3. Doing exercises</b>
<i><b>a, Exercise 1 (page 136)</b></i>


<i>Which of the following verbs can have an object, and which cannot?</i>


- Feedback


* Verbs can have an object: read, write, meet, help, grow, climb
* Verbs can’t have an object: sleep, lie, occur, arrive, rain, exist


<i><b>b, Exercise 2 (page 136)</b></i>



<i>Which verbs in the following sentences are T (transitive) and which are I </i>
<i>(intransitive). Tick the right column.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- happened (I) 5- arrived (I)
2- bought (T) 6- are staying (I)
3- won (T) 7- is blowing (I)
4- won (I) 8- walked (I)


<i><b>c, Exercise 3 (page 137)</b></i>


<i>Choose the sentences that have objects and then change them to the </i>
<i>passive voice.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- The bill will be paid by An.


3- Towels are supplied by the hotel.
5- My mistakes were noticed.
7- I wasn’t surprised by the news.
9- The story was told by an old man.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>



- Redo exercises at home


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

<b>P.D:</b><i><b>03.03.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>78: Unit 13: </b>

<b>The 22</b>

<b>nd</b>

<b><sub> sea games</sub></b>



<b>T.D:... </b>

<b>Period 1</b>

<b>: </b>

A - Reading


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: Reading a passage about the 22nd<sub> Sea Games held in Vietnam then doing the tasks</sub>


2. Education: - Knowing something more about Sea Games.
3. Skills: Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>



- Presentation and practice


- Pair, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (no)</b></i>


1- Exercise 2 – Part language focus (workbook – Unit 12) - (1 st)
2- Exercise 3 – Part language focus (workbook – Unit 12) - (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about


their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts read through the
passage then find out new
words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully


<b>1. Before you read (page 138)</b>


<i>* Look at the picture. Ask and answer the following questions.</i>


- Feedback


1- It was the 22nd<sub> Sea Games.</sub>


2- The event took place in Vietnam.



<i>* Presenting the new words</i>


- enthusiast (n): ngêi say mª


- solidarity (n): sự thống nhất, sự đoàn kết
- composed (a): gåm cã, bao gåm


- rank (v): xÕp h¹ng


- energetic (a): m¹nh mÏ, m·nh liƯt
- intensive


- title (n): danh hiệu, danh hiệu vô địch
<b>2. While you read (page 140)</b>


<i><b>a. Task 1 (page 140)</b></i>


<i>Give the Vietnamese equivalents to the following words and phrases.</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers
1- sports enthusiast: ngêi say mª thĨ thao
2- solidarity: sù thèng nhÊt


3- title: danh hiệu vơ địch


4- bodybuilding: thể dục thể hình
5- high spirit: tinh thần cao
6- countrymen: đồng bào
<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 140)</b></i>



<i>Scan the passage and complete each of the following sentences.</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers
1- the 5th<sub> to 13</sub>th<sub> December, 2003</sub>


2- 90 golds


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

- Sts read the passage
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 3
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in groups
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



4- some point in the future


<i><b>c. Task 3 (page 140)</b></i>


<i>Answer the questions.</i>


- Feedback and give answers


1- It was solidarity, co-operartion for peace and development.
2- 444 gold medals were won at the Sae Games.


3- The Vietnamese Women’s Football team successfully defended the
Sea Games title.


4- The Thai Men’s Football team won the gold medal.


5- It was because firstly, to prepare for the 22nd<sub> SeaGames, Vietnam </sub>


carried out an intensive programme for its athletes, which included
training in facilities, both home and abroad; secondly, with the strong
support of their countrymen, the Vietnamese athletes competed in high
spirits.


<b>3. After you read (page 140)</b>


<i>Work with a partner and name some of the Vietnamese athletes you love. </i>
<i>Say what they are famous for, and what aspects of sportsmanship you </i>
<i>admire (fairness, respect, generosity...).</i>


- Feedback


...


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice reading at home


- Do exercise part: Reading in workbook
- Prepare for the next period


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>09.03.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>79: Unit 13: </b>

<b>The 22</b>

<b>nd</b>

<b><sub> sea games</sub></b>



<b>T.D:... </b>

<b>Period 2</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>b - speaking</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>


<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Talking about sports events of the 22nd<sub> Sea Games and talking about sports results.</sub>


2. Education: - Knowing some more about the 22nd<sub> Sea Games held in Vietnam.</sub>


3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Pair, group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

2- Read the passage then do task 3 (2 sts)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Explain the require
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts work in pairs


- Sts compare with other
pairs


- Sts talk about the name of
the sport.


- Sts discuss which sport(s)
they like or dislike


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2
- T explains task 2
- Sts work in pairs
- T goes around and help
- T calls sts to talk about


their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task 3
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Task 1(page 141)</b>


<i>Discuss and write the name of the sport under each symbol. Which </i>
<i>sport(s) do you like/ dislike? Give your reasons.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggestion


1- football (soccer) 4- cycling
2- tennis 5- basketball
3- swimming 6- running


<b>2. Task 2 (page 141)</b>


<i>Talk about some of the records at the 22nd<sub> Sea Games, using the </sub></i>


<i>information in the table below.</i>


Eg: Boonthung, the Thai, won the men’s 200 metres. He ran 200 metres


in 20.14 seconds.


- Feedback


* Erni, the Indonesian, won the women’s marathon. She ran 42 km in 2
hours 52 minutes 28 seconds.


* Amri, the Malaysian, won the men’s long jump. He jumped 7.76
metres.


* Ruphai, the Thai, won the women’s high jump. She jumped 1.86
metres.


* Yurita, the Indonesian, won the men’s swimming. He swam 1,500
metres in 13 minutes 19.25 seconds.


* Maria, the Filipino, won the women’s cycling. She traveled 25 km
cross-country in 1 hour 29 minutes 35 seconds.


* Dannal, the Thai, won the men’s tennis (singles).


He defeated Febi, the Indonesian, winning two sets 6-2, 6-1.


<b>3. Task 3 (page 132)</b>


<i>Make a report on the sport results, using the information in the score </i>
<i>board.</i>


Eg: Vietnam and Myanmar played in the women’s football final. The
Vietnamese team won the gold medal. The result (score) was 2-1.


- Feedback and give the suggestion


* Thailand and Malaysia played in the women’s football third-place
play-off. The Thai team won the bronze medal. The result was 6-1.


* Thailand and Vietnam played in the men’s football final. The Thai team
won the gold medal. The result was 2-1.


* The Thailand and Vietnam played in the women’s volleyball final. The
Thai team won the gold medal. The result was 3-0.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice speaking at home


- Do exercise part: Speaking in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 12– C- Listening


<b>P.D:10.03. 2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>80: Unit 13: </b>

<b>The 22</b>

<b>nd</b>

<b><sub> sea games</sub></b>



<b>T.D:... </b>

<b>Period 3</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>C- listening</b>


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>



1. Knowledge: - Listening to two newspaper articles about some records of Pole Vaulting and
Vietnamese women’s football about players then doing the tasks that follow.
2. Education: - Knowing some more about players who took part in the 22nd<sub> Sea Games.</sub>


3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, the whole class and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Task 2 (1 st)
2- Task 3 (1 st)



III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- T gives new words and
their meanings


- T lets sts practice
pronouncing.


- Sts listen to the disk and
repeat twice


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check


<b>1. Before you listen (page 142)</b>


<i>* Ask and answer the following questions.</i>


- Feedback


1- It is pole vaulting. I like it because it makes people feel like flying.
2- No, I can’t


* <i>Presenting new words</i>


- odd (n): thể dục thể thao
- tempting (a): hấp dẫn, lôi cuốn
- proposal (n): đề xuất, đề nghị
- milkmaid (n): ngời vắt sữa
- to clear (v): nhảy qua
- podium (n): bục danh dự
- deal (n): sự thoả thuận
- pole vaulting (n): nhảy sào
<i>* Listen and repeat</i>



<b>2. While you listen (page 143)</b>
<i><b>a, Task 1 (page 143)</b></i>


<i>Listen to the first newspaper article about Amnat, the winner in the 22nd</i>


<i>Southeast Asian Games Pole Vaulting competition, and answer the </i>
<i>questions.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- one 3- 4.8 m


2- Thailand 4- No, he didn’t


<i><b>b, Task 2 (page 143)</b></i>


<i>Listen to the second newspaper article about the players of Vietnamese </i>
<i>women’s football team and decide whether the statements are true (T) or </i>
<i>false (F).</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers
1- T 4- T
2- F (perhaps) 5- F (café)
3- T


<b>3. After you listen (page 143)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

- T corrects mistakes
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<i>like best? Why?</i>


- Feedback and give suggestions


* I like Phan Van Tai Em best because he is a good player and he is very
honest, faithful.


…………..


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice listening at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 12 – D – Writing


<b>P.D:12.03.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>81: Unit 13: </b>

<b>The 22</b>

<b>nd</b>

<b><sub> sea games</sub></b>



<b>T.D:... </b>

<b>Period 4</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>d - writing</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Describing a sport event (a football match)


2. Education: - Knowing how to report a sport event especially a football match.
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Individual, pair and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan



<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (2 sts)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task


-T explains the requirements
- Sts discuss in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- T gives useful language
and the meaning of those


phrases


<b>1. Task 1: (page 143-144)</b>


<i>Put the questions in the suitable sections.</i>


- Feedback


a- Introduction: 4-7-3


b- Details of the match: 6-1-8-9-10
c- Conclusion: 2-5


<b>2. Taks 2 (page 144)</b>


<i>Ask and answer the above questions about a football match you have </i>
<i>watched recently.</i>


* Give useful language
a- Nouns:


- player, captain, defender, striker, goal keeper, referee, forwards.
- spectators, opponents


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

- Sts pronounce after T


- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about


their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- Sts write individually
- T calls sts to write their
writing on the green board
- T corrects mistakes
- T collects some writings


- goal kick: cú phạt bóng
- free kick: quả phạt trực tiếp
- offside: việt vị


- inside left/ right: tiền vệ trái/ phải


- center spot/ center circle/ penalty area/ goal area
b- Verbs:


- infringe: phạm lỗi
- dribble: lừa bóng


- pass the ball: chuyền bong
- score a goal: ghi bàn


- take a part: nhận đường truyền
- even up the score: san bằng tỷ số
- obstruct: truy cản



- blow a whistle: thổi còi
- defeat: đánh bại


c- Adjectives


- boring, competitive, exciting, fair, unfair…
- drawn: hoà


- decisive: quyết liệt


* Feedback and give suggestions.


<b>3. Taks 3 (page 144)</b>


<i>Write a description of the football match mentioned above, based on the </i>
<i>results of Task 1 and 2. The Useful Language may help you.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested writing


To celebrate the Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union’s Foundation
Day, our school’s sport club recently played a friendly football match
with Tran Nguyen Han school’s football team. The match was held on
25th<sub> of March, at 3 PM at our school playground.</sub>


The match took place in cool weather, which was good for both teams.
From the beginning, two teams played very excitingly. In the first half,
we always kept the ball away from our goal and led the ball toward our
neighbouring team. However, after 30 minutes, the opponents scored a
goal. The goal was so fine that all of the audiences jumped up and


cheered. From then on, the match was more exciting. In the second half,
our team played in greater determination. One of our excellent defenders,
Hung, took a ball and passed it skillfully to our striker, Thang, who gave
a final kick into the goal. The stadium was “broken” again in the shouts
and whistles of the spectators. It was one against one. The atmosphere at
the stadium made the match tenser and tenser. Both teams tried their best
but no more score was given. The match ended in a drawn but all of us
were very happy. I felt very proud of my school football team. They had
shown a wonderful way of playing, a sportsmanlike style young, fair and
impartial.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice writing at home


- Do exercise part: Writing in workbook


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

<b>P.D: </b><i><b>14.03.2010</b></i><b> </b>

<b>§82: Unit 13: The 22</b>

<b>nd</b>

<b> sea games</b>


<b>T.D:... </b>

<b>Period 5</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>E </b>

<b> language focus</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Pronunciation: Linking


- Grammar: Double comparisons.
2. Education: - Comparing with Vietnamese
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Individual, pair and the whole class work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>


<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Read your writing at home. (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T gives examples and lets
sts give their remarks
- T explains linking


- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts practise in turns


- T reviews grammar notes
- Sts answer questions:
1- What is the comparative?
2- What is double


comparative?
- Sts give examples



<b>1. Pronunciation(page 145) : Linking</b>


<i>a, Definition: </i>


- The act of linking sound between and ending consonant and a beginning
vowel.


Eg: look at, put off, turn on …


<i>b, Practise reading these sentences. (page 145-146)</i>


<b>2. Grammar (page 146 - 147): Double comparisons</b>


<i>a, Comparative and comparative</i>


- We repeat comparatives to say that something is changing continuously.
* Short adjectives/ adverbs : <i><b>adj-er and adj-er</b></i>


<i><b> adv-er and adv-er</b></i>


Eg: It’s getting darker and darker.
They work harder and harder.


* Long adjectives and adverbs: <i><b>more and more + adj/ adv</b></i>


Eg: She is becoming more and more beautiful.
He speaks English more and more fluently.
* Irregular adjectives/ adverbs:


Eg: The weather is becoming better and better.



<i>b, The comparative …, the comparative…</i>


- We use “the comparative …, the comparative …” to say that one thing
depends on another thing.


* Short adjectives/ adverbs: <i><b>the adj-er / the adv-er</b></i>


* Long adjectives and adverbs: <i><b>the more + adj/ adv</b></i>


* Irregular adjectives/ adverbs: <i>the better/ the worse/ the more…</i>


Eg: The longer we wait, the happier we feel.
The more we learn, the more we forget.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

- Sts study exercise 1
- Sts work pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study exercise 2
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study exercise 3


- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<i><b>a, Exercise 1 (page 146)</b></i>


<i>Match a half-sentence from box A with a suitable half-sentence from box </i>
<i>B.</i>


- Feedback


1- c 3- a 5- d
2- e 4- b 6- g
7- f


<i><b>b, Exercise 2 (page 146)</b></i>


<i>Complete each of the following sentences, using the structure </i>


<b>comparative + and + comparative </b><i>with the words in brackets.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- shorter and shorter 5- better and better
2- more and more expensive 6- more and more active
3- worse and worse 7- more and more difficult
4- more and more complicated 8- closer and closer



<i><b>c, Exercise 3 (page 147)</b></i>


<i>Complete each of the following sentences, using the structure: </i><b>the + </b>
<b>comparative …, The + comparative …</b><i>. Choose a suitable </i>
<i>half-sentence from the box.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- the better I feel 5- the better the service
2- the faster you will learn 6- the more I liked him
3- the more impatient he became 7- the more you want
4- the higher your bill will be


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home


- Do exercises in workbook – part: Language focus


<b>P.D:18.03.2010 </b>

<b>§</b>

<b>83: </b>

<b>test yourself e</b>



<b>T.D: </b>…………<b> </b>
<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>


<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Sts check themselves the knowledge of English they have learnt in the two latest units
(unit 11 – unit 13).


2. Education: - Recreation.
3. Skills: - practical skills


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Testing yourself


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (15 minute test)</b></i>


1. Give topics: two topics (handouts)
2. Answer keys and mark levels
* Topic 1:



I. 1- I 2- T 3- I 4- T 5- I
II.1- higher and higher 4- more and more fluently
2- colder and colder 5- better and better


3- more and more difficult
* Topic 2:


I. 1- I 2- I 3- T 4- T 5- T
II. 1- harder and harder 4- nearer and nearer


2- worse and worse 5- more and more intelligent
3- more and more expensive


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task


- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts do the task individually
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
carefully


- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually


- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts work individually
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T collects and corrects
some writings


<b>1. Listening (page 148) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i>Listen to the text and write down the missing word or number: the first </i>
<i>one has benn done as an example.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- illustrations 4- 868


2- preserve 5- knowledge


3- bamboo


<b>2. Reading (page 148-149) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i>Read the text and decide which type of sport (A-E) corresponds with each</i>
<i>description. You may use and match more than once.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- B 4- C
2- D 5- E
3- A


<b>3. Grammar (page 150) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i>In each pair of sentences below one sentence has a transitive verb and </i>
<i>the other an intransitive verb. Mark the sentences T (transitive) or I </i>
<i>(intransitive). The first one has been done as an example.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
2- T/ I 7- I/ T
3- T/ I 8- I/ T
4- I/ T 9- I/ T
5- T/ I 10- T/ I
6- I/ T


<b>4. Writing (page 151) (2.5 points) – At home</b>


<i>In about 120 words, write about a bout you have read recently.</i>


* Suggestions



- Name(s) of the author(s) - The title of the book
- Year of publication - The length of the book
- The main theme of the story - The setting of the story
- The main characters - Your opinion of the book
* Mark levels


- Structures: 1 point
- Content: 0.5 point
- Vocabulary: 1 point


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home
- Revise for the next period.


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>19.03.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>84: Unit 14: </b>

<b>international organizations</b>



<b>T.D: </b>…………<b>. </b>

<b>Period 1</b>

<b>: </b>

A - Reading


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: Reading a passage about the Red Cross then doing the tasks.
2. Education: - Knowing about one of international organizations: The Red Cross.
3. Skills: Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting



- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (no)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts read through the
passage then find out new
words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



<b>1. Before you read (page 152)</b>


<i>* Ask and answer the following questions</i>


1- Giving medical aids, taking care of victims of poverty.
2- Yes, there is.


- Feedback


<i>* Presenting the new words</i>


- humanitarian (n): nhân đạo
- civilian (n): thờng dân
- appalled (a): khởi sự
- to appeal (v): kêu gọi
- delegate (n): ngời đại diện


- emergency (n): tình trạng khẩn cấp
- catastrophe (n): tai ơng


- hesitation (n): sù do dù
- dedicate (v): cèng hiÕn


- disaster stricken (a): bị thiên tai tàn phá
- tsunami (n): sang thÇn


<b>2. While you read (page 154)</b>
<i><b>a. Task 1 (page 154)</b></i>



<i>Choose the best words in the box to complete the following sentences.</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 3
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 154)</b></i>



<i>Decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F).</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers
1- T 4- F
2- T 5- T
3- T


<i><b>c. Task 3 (page 154)</b></i>


<i>Answer the questions.</i>


- Feedback and give answers


1- The Red Cross Federation’s mission is to improve the lives of
vulnerable people.


2- 186 countries.


3- People in the country can get quick help and supports when they are in
difficulty.


<b>3. After you read (page 154-155)</b>


<i>Fill in each space of the following paragraph with a suitable word.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested asnwers
1- appalled 3- of
2- lack 4- in


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>



- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice reading at home


- Do exercise part: Reading in workbook
- Prepare for the next period


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>29.01.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>85: Unit 14: </b>

<b>international organizations</b>



<b>T.D: </b>

<b>Period 2</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>b - speaking</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>



<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Talking about international organizations and their activities in charity and volunteer
work.


2. Education: - Knowing more about international organizations.
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Pair, group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

1- New words (1 st)


2- Read the passage then do task 2 (1 st)
3- Read the passage, then do task 3 (1 st)



III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts find out new words
- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts work in pairs


- Sts compare with other
pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2
- T explains task 2
- Sts work in pairs
- T goes around and help
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes



- Sts study the task 3
- Sts work in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Task 1(page 155)</b>


<i>Read the passage and answer the questions.</i>


<i><b>a- Presenting new words</b></i>


- objective (n): mục tiêu


- constitution (n): hiến pháp, sự thành lập
- attainment (n): tri thức, sự đạt được
- advocate (v): biện hộ, bào chữa


<i><b>b- Doing the task</b></i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


1- WHO stands for the World Health Organization.
2- It was established on 7 April 1948


3- Its major objective is the attainment by all peoples of the highest


possible level of health.


4- Its main activities are carrying out research on medical development
and improving international health care.


<b>2. Task 2 (page 156)</b>


<i>Below are some brief information about two interbational organizations. </i>
<i>Ask and answer questions about them.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggestion
a- UNICEF:


A: When was UNICEF founded?
B: In 1948.


A: Where is its headquarters located?
B: In New York.


A: What is UNICEF’s aim?


B: Its aim is to advocate for the protect of children’s rights, to help their
basic needs and help them reach their full potential.


A: What is UNICEF involved in?


B: It provides supports and funds for the most disadvantaged
children-victims of war, disasters and extreme poverty. It also carries out
education development programs for children.



b- WWF: (the same) …………


<b>3. Task 3 (page 156)</b>


<i>Talk a partner what you know about one of the above mentioned </i>
<i>international organizations. Use the information from task 1 and 2.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggestion


WWF was founded in 1961. It is located to protecting endangered wild
animals and their habitat. It carries out research on endangered species. It
also collects data on rare and endangered animals and plants.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice speaking at home


- Do exercise part: Speaking in workbook


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

<b>P.D:30.01. 2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>86: Unit 14: </b>

<b>international organizations</b>



<b>T.D: </b>…………<b>. </b>

<b>Period 3</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>C- listening</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>


<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Listening to a passage about an international organization: The United Nations then
doing the tasks that follow.


2. Education: - Knowing more about international organizations.
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>



1- Talk about UNICEF. (1 st)
2- Talk about WWF. (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work in pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes
- Sts work in groups


<b>1. Before you listen (page 156-157))</b>


<i>a- Look at the picture. Ask and answer the question: What do you know </i>
<i>about the organization in the picture?</i>


- Feedback and give suggested questions


1- Where is the building situated? (In New York)


2- Which international organization does it belong to? (The United
Nations)


3- How popular is the United Nations? (Very popular)


<i>b- Listen and repeat</i>


<b>2. While you listen (page 157)</b>
<i><b>a, Task 1 (page 157)</b></i>


<i>Listen to the first part of the passage and circle the best answer A, B, C </i>
<i>or D to the following questions</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers



1- C 2- D 3- C


<i><b>b, Task 2 (page 157)</b></i>


<i>Listen to the second part of the passage and fill in the missing words.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers
1- solve international problems 4- at war


2- the UN 5- independence
3- in its goals


<b>3. After you listen (page 158)</b>


<i>List as many as possible the names of the international organizations you</i>
<i>have known so far.</i>


- Feedback and give suggestions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


2- WHO 5- WTO
3- UNESCO 6- WWF
………..



<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice listening at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 14 – D – Writing


<b>P.D:20.03.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>87: Unit 14: </b>

<b>international organizations</b>



<b>T.D: </b>………<b>... </b>

<b>Period 4</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>d - writing</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Writing a short description of international organization.
2. Education: - Knowing much more about international organizations.
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Individual, pair and group work



<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Talk about the United Nations (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task


-T explains the requirements
- Sts discuss in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- T corrects mistakes


- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps


<b>1. Task 1: (page 158)</b>


<i>Discuss the question: Which international organizations would you like </i>
<i>to work for: WWF, WHO, or the UN? Explain your choice. Use the </i>
<i>following suggestions:</i>


- Feedback and give the suggestion


1- A: Which international organization would you like to work for: WWF,
WHO, or the UN?


B: I’d like to work for WHO.


A: Why do you choose to work for WHO?


B: Because I like biology and I’m very good at it. If I work for WHO. I
will have a chance to do much medical research and help improve


international health care. I will meet people from different countries in
the world and I will speak English at work.


.
………


<b>2. Taks 2 (page 158)</b>



<i>Suppose you were offered a job with one of the above international </i>
<i>organizations, which one would you like to choose? Write a paragraph of</i>
<i>about 100 words expressing the reason why you choose the organization.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

- Sts write individually
- T calls sts to write their
writing on the green board
- T corrects mistakes
- T collects some writings


I would like to work for the UN for a number of reasons. First, I can live
and work in New York. Second, If I work for the UN, I will have a
chance to use English at work. I will travel around the world and meet
defferent people from many countries in the world. Finally, I will have an
opportunity to get high salary.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice writing at home


- Do exercise part: Writing in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 14 – E – Language focus


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>21.03.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>88: Unit 14: </b>

<b>international organizations</b>




<b>T.D:... </b>

<b>Period 5</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>E </b>

<b> language focus</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Pronunciation: The falling tune
- Grammar: Phrasal verbs (p1)
2. Education: - Comparing with Vietnamese
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Individual, pair and the whole class work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting



- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Collect 3 writings to give marks.


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T pronounces as a model
- T explains


- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts practise in turns


- T reviews grammar notes
- Sts answer questions: How
to form a phrasal verb?
- Sts give examples


<b>1. Pronunciation(page 159) : The falling tune</b>


<i>a- Explaining: </i>


- In simple sentences: It’s time to get up.↓
- WH- questions: Who is absent today? ↓
- Imperative sentences: Sit down. ↓


- Suggestions: Let’s go home. ↓


<i>b- Practise reading the following sentences with the falling tune.(159)</i>


<b>2. Grammar (page 159-160): Phrasal verbs</b>


- A phrasal verb is a verb that consists of one verb and an adverbial or a
preposition. → Idom meanings


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

- T gives sts some phrasal
verbs


- Sts practise


- Sts study exercise 1
- Sts work individually
- Sts compare with their
partner


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study exercise 2
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study exercise 2
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


* Intransitive verb + adv: touch down, set off…
Eg: We set off early in the morning.


* Transitive verb + adv + O or transitive verb + O + adv : make out, give
up, pick up …


Eg: I couldn’t make the car number out.
= I couldn’t make out the car number.
* Some suggested phrasal verbs:


- to wash up (v): rửa dọn
- to look up (v): tra cứu


- to turn up = to arrive (v): xuất hiện, đến
- to take after (v): giống


- to get over = to recover from (v): phục hồi
- to go off = to explode (v): nổ (bom đạn)
- to try out (v): thử


- to hold up = to delay (v): hoãn lại



<b>3. Doing exercises</b>
<i><b>a, Exercise 1 (page 159)</b></i>


<i>Complete the sentences below, using the words from box. Some words </i>
<i>can be used more than one.</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers


1- give up 6- look up
2- fill in 7- turn off
3- turn on 8- fill in
4- take off 9- go on
5- wash up 10- put on


<i><b>b, Exercise 2 (page 160)</b></i>


<i>Complete the sentences below, using the right words from the box. Some </i>
<i>words can be used more than one.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- in 5- on 9- down
2- up 6- up 10- on
3- out 7- down


4- round 8- away


<i><b>c, Exercise 3 (page 160-161)</b></i>


<i>Replace the words in brackets in the following sentences with a suitable </i>


<i>phrasal verb in the box. (Make any other necessary changes)</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- turns up 5- held up
2- look after 6- try out
3- takes after 7- went off
4- got over


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home


- Do exercises in workbook – part: Language focus
- Prepare for the one period test


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>02.04.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>89: </b>

<b>The one period test</b>



<b>T.D: </b>...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>3</b></i> <i><b>4</b></i> <i><b>5</b></i> <i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


-Check sts’ knowledge of English from unit 12 to unit 14.



<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Multiple choice test


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: pens


- Teacher: English paper test, topics and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T gives sts requirements
- T gives sts test papers
- Sts do the test individually
- T collects test papers.


<b>1. Topics: - </b>4 topics<i>(handouts)<b> </b></i>


<b>2. Mark levels and answer keys.</b>
<i><b>*Topic 01</b></i>


<i>I. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. A 2. C 3. B 4. B 5. A


<i>II. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. B 2. B 3. C 4. C 5. D
6. B 7. D 8. C 9. C 10. C
11. A 12. A 13. D 14. D 15. D
16. A 17. A 18. A 19. A 20. A


<i>III. 0.5 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. A 2. C 3. B 4. A 5. C


<i>IV. 0.25 point for each correct answer.</i>


1. D 2. C 3. B 4. B 5. C


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo the test at home



<b>P.D:03.04.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>90: </b>

<b>paying back the one period test</b>



<b>T.D: </b>...


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


- Paying English papers back to sts.


- Correcting common mistakes and giving remarks on the test so that sts can do the other test better.
- Giving answer keys.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- presentation


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: pens


- Teacher: English papers and lesson plan


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting



- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the test


- Sts compare with a partner
- T gives remarks on the test
- T gives answer keys
- T corrects common
mistakes


1- Paying back the English papers
2- Giving remarks on the test.


- Students: lazy and lack of knowledge
- Best part:


- Worst part :
- Best work:
- Worst work:


3- Correct common mistakes
-



-
-



<i><b>-IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo the test at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 15- A: Reading


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>o4.04.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>91: Unit 15: </b>

<b>women in society</b>



<b>T.D:... </b>

<b>Period 1</b>

<b>: </b>

A - Reading


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: Reading a text about <i><b>women in society</b></i> then doing the tasks


2. Education: - Being awareof the role of women in society – They are not “weaker sex”.
3. Skills: Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6



<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (no)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts read through the
passage then find out new
words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers



- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 3
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in groups
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


<i>a- Look at the picture and answer the questions that follow.</i>


- Feedback
1- six roles


2- Yes, it is. Because she goes to work and she does the housework as


well.


<i>b- Presenting the new words</i>


- childbearing (n): việc
- involve (v):


- intellectual ability (n): khả năng trí tuệ
- status (n):


- Age of Enlightenment (n): thời đại khai sang, kỉ ngun khai sáng
- homemaking (n): chăm sóc gia đình


- philosopher (n): nhà triết học
- pioneer (n): người tiên phong
- struggle (n): sự đấu tranh
- advocate (v): tán thành


- discriminate (v): phân biệt đối xử
- significant (n):


- deep-seated (a): ăn sâu, lâu đời


<b>2. While you read (page 163-165)</b>
<i><b>a. Task 1 (page 163)</b></i>


<i>Give the Vietnamese equivalents to the following words and phrases.</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers



1- human civilization: nền văn minh nhân loại
2- childbearing: việc sinh con


3- involvement: sự tham gia


4- Age of Enlightenment: thời đại khai sang


5- deep-seated cultural beliefs: những niềm tin ăn sâu vào tiềm thức
6- homemaking: việc chăm sóc gia đình


7- intellectural ability: khả năng trí tuệ


8- equal work opportunity: cơ hội việc làm bình đẳng


<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 164)</b></i>


<i>Choose the best option A, B, C or D to answer the following questions.</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers
1- C 4- B
2- D 5- A
3- C


<i><b>c. Task 3 (page 165)</b></i>


<i>Choose the best title for the passage</i>


- Feedback and give answers
C- Women’s rights



<b>3. After you read (page 165)</b>


<i>Summarise the reading passage by writing ONE sentence for each </i>
<i>paragraph.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested asnwers


1- In the past, women were re stricted to the role of mothers and wives
due to widespread doubt about their inllectural ability.


2- The struggle for women’s rights began in the 18th<sub> century as European </sub>


political philosophers believed that women should be treated equally.
3- Women now enjoy important legal rights such as equal work
opportunities and equal pay, the right to vote and to gain education.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice reading at home


- Do exercise part: Reading in workbook
- Prepare for the next period


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>04.04.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>92: Unit 15: </b>

<b>women in society</b>



<b>T.D:... </b>

<b>Period 2</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>b - speaking</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Expressing opinions and expressing degrees of agreement.


2. Education: - Knowing how to give opinions and to express degrees of agreement.
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, group work and the whole class work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>



- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1 st)


2- Read the passage then do task 2 (1 st)
3- Do the “<i>after you read</i>” (1 st)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- T explain the meaning of
the given expressions
- Sts read the expressions
individually


- T calls on sts to make
sentences with those


expressions


- Sts study task 2 carefully
- Sts work in groups of 4
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study the task 3
- Sts work in groups


<b>1. Task 1(page 165)</b>


<i>Study the expressions and practice saying them aloud.</i>


- Feedback


Eg: I think women are more patient then men.


I agree that women take care of children better than men.
……..


<b>2. Task 2 (page 165-166)</b>


<i>Read and respond to these statements. Begin your responses with one of </i>
<i>the expressions in Task 1.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggestion
A: Men are usually stronger than women.


B: I quite agree.


C: Women are usually more sympathetic than men.
D: That’s right.


<b>3. Task 3 (page 166)</b>


<i>Discuss whether you agree or disagree with the following statement and </i>
<i>give explanations.</i>


<i><b>“Married women should not go to work”</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


1- A: I think married women should not go to work.


B: I agree with you. If they stay at home, they have time to look after
their children better and do the housework.


C: I don’t agree. Because they are dependent and they have no
decisions and power.


2- A: I think married women should not go to work.


B: That’s right. Because they will carry out the traditional role of
housewives well.



C: That’s not true. Because they will be slaves at home.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice speaking at home


- Do exercise part: Speaking in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 15– C- Listening


<b>P.D:05.04. 2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>93: Unit 15: </b>

<b>women in society</b>



<b>T.D:... </b>

<b>Period 3</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>C- listening</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Listening to a passage about a typical day of an African village woman then doing the
tasks that follow.


2. Education: - Knowing more about women’s daily life
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, the whole class and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4


12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Task 3 (2 sts)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts listen to the disk and
repeat twice


- Sts study task 1 carefully


<b>1. Before you listen (page 167)</b>


<i>a- Answer the following question: “Is the life of a city woman easier than</i>
<i>that of a village woman nowsdays? What is your point of view? Why?”</i>


- Feedback


+ I think the life of a city woman is easier than that of a village woman
nowadays. Because a city woman earns much more money than a village


woman does and she is treated more equally than a village one.


<i>b- Listen and repeat</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes



<i>Listen to the passage and choose the best answer A, B or C to complete </i>
<i>each sentence.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- B 4- A
2- C 5- B
3- C


<i><b>b, Task 2 (page 168)</b></i>


<i>Listen again and answer the following questions</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers
1- 40%


2- They earn nothing for doing their domestic work.
3- They produce more than half of the food.


4- 80%


5- At 4.45 A.M.
6- At 9.30 P.M.


<b>3. After you listen (page 168)</b>


<i>Compare a typical day of an African village woman in the listening </i>
<i>passage with that of a woman in your daily life (for example: your sister, </i>
<i>your mother …)</i>



- Feedback and give suggestions


My mother is not as hard as that African village woman. Because she
gets up at 5.30 and she goes to the field at 6.30. She works there until
10.30 A.M then she goes home to prepare lunch. My father shares the
housework with my mother. In addition to that, my family use gas to
cook meals so she doesn’t have to collect firewood.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice listening at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 15 – D – Writing


<b>P.D:08.04.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>94: Unit 15: </b>

<b>women in society</b>



<b>T.D:... </b>

<b>Period 4</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>d - writing</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Describing a chart.


2. Education: - Comparing to Vietnamese language.
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Individual, pair and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks


- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, letters of examples


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Do “After you listen” – 2 sts


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task


-T explains the requirements
- Sts discuss in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- Sts write individually
- T calls sts to write their
writing on the green board
- T corrects mistakes
- T collects some writings


<b>1. Task 1: (page 168-169)</b>



<i>The chart below shows the average hours of housework per week by </i>
<i>people of different sexes and with different marital status in Fantasia. </i>
<i>Look at the chart then answer the questions that follow.</i>


- Feedback and give suggested answers


1- In general, married women do more housework than men do.
2- They have to do more housework when they have more children.
3- Married men have to do less housework when they have more
children.


4- Married men and women without children spend 20 to 30 hours on
their housework per week respectively.


5- It takes men and women with one or two children 15 and 50 hours
respectively to do their housework every week.


6- They are 10 and 55.


7- Married men should spend more time sharing the housework with their
wives.


<b>2. Taks 2 (page 169)</b>


<i>Write a report describing the information shown in the column chart in </i>
<i>Task 1. </i>


- Feedback and give suggestions.


The column chart illustrates the average hours of housework per week


done by married women in comparison with married men in Fantasia.
In households where there are no children, women are reported to work
30 hours per week in housework. Men’s contribution to this work
averages a considerably lower 20 hours.


When children enter the household, however, the inequality becomes
even more pronounced. In families of 1-2 children, the amount of time
given to housework by men is just 15 hours, but the number of hours
women work in the home rises to 52 per week, much of which, no doubt,
is due to childcare responsibilities.


Interestingly, when there are 3 or more children in the household, men
are found to work even fewer hours around the home than before the
appearance of the third child. Whereas women’s unpaid hours rise to
approximately 55 per week, the corresponding figure for men, 10,
actually represents a decrease.


The chart suggests that if women are to gain social equality, they should
first be liberated from familiar responsibilities. This can only be done if
men lend a more helpful hand to women in doing domestic chores.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice writing at home


- Do exercise part: Writing in workbook



- Prepare for the next period: Unit 15 – E – Language focus


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>11.04.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>95: Unit 15: </b>

<b>women in society</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Intonation: The rising tune
- Grammar: Phrasal verbs (P2)
2. Education: - Comparing with Vietnamese
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Individual, pair and the whole class work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>



- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- What is a phrasal verb? – Give examples


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T pronounces as a model
- T explains the rising tune
- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts practise in turns


- T reviews grammar notes
- Sts answer questions: How
to form a phrasal verb?
- Sts give examples
- T gives sts some useful
phrasal verbs.


- Sts make examples with
those useful phrasal verbs


<b>1. Intonation(page 169) : The rising tune</b>



<i>a, Definition</i>


- In questions (Yes/ no questions)
Eg: Is it made of wood? ↑


- In request sentences:


Eg: Come in. ↑ Stop talking. ↑
- In saying: Goodnight. ↑


- In WH- questions for interviewing.


Eg: What’s your name? ↑ Where do you live? ↑


<i>b, Practise reading these sentences. (page 169)</i>


<b>2. Grammar (page 170 - 171): Phrasal verbs (P2)</b>


<i>a, Verbs + prep + Object: </i>take after, come with …
Eg: She takes after her mother.


<i>b, Verbs + adv + prep + O: </i>run out of, look forward to, put up with …
Eg: I can’t put up with another hot summer.


* Some useful phrasal verbs


- explain St to Sb: giải thích cho ai cái gì
- invite Sb to: mời ai đến đâu



- laugh at Sb: cười chế nhạo ai
- point at: chỉ vào


- glance at: liếc nhìn ai
- speak to: nói với ai


- throw St at Sb: ném cái gì vào ai
- stare at Sb: nhìn chằm vào ai
- apply to/ for: áp dụng vào/ nộp đơn
- ask Sb for St: hỏi xin ai cái gì
- search for: tìm


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

- Sts study exercise 1
- Sts work pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study exercise 2
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>3. Doing exercises</b>
<i><b>a, Exercise 1 (page 170)</b></i>



<i>Choose one of the following verbs (in the correct form) + the correct </i>
<i>preposition to complete the sentences.</i>


- Feedback


1- glanced at 5- staring at
2- invited to 6- speaking to
3- listen to 7- wrote to
4- throw … at 8- point … at


<i><b>b, Exercise 2 (page 171)</b></i>


<i>Fill in each of the blanks with an appropriate preposition if necessary.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- for 5- about 9- for
2- for 6- Ø 10- for
3- to 7- about


4- for 8- Ø


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home



- Do exercises in workbook – part: Language focus
- Prepare for the next period.


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>13.04.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>96: Unit 16: </b>



<b>T.D:</b>...

<b> </b>

<b>the association of southeast asian nations</b>



<b> </b>

<b>Period 1</b>

<b>: </b>

A - Reading


<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: Reading a passage about the foundation of the Association of Southeast Asian Nations
then doing the tasks



2. Education: - Helping sts know more about the ASEAN.
3. Skills: Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, groups, the whole class and individual work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Phrasal verbs (2 sts)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts read through the
passage then find out new
words


- T gives the meaning of the
new words


- Sts pronounce after T
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully
- Sts read the passage
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 3


- Sts work in pairs
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in groups
- Sts discuss


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Feedback


1- It stands for the Association of Southeast Asian Nations.
2- Vietnam joined this association in July, 1995.


<i>b- Presenting the new words</i>


- association (n): hiệp hội
- accelebrate (v): thúc đẩy
- justice (n): sự công bằng


- diverse (a): thuộc nhiều loại khác nhau
- statistics (n): thống kê


- integration (n): sự hội nhập


- realization (n): sự hiện thực hoá
- socio- economic (a): Kinh tế - xã hội


<b>2. While you read (page 173-175)</b>
<i><b>a. Task 1 (page 174)</b></i>


<i>The word in the box all appear in the passage. Fill in each blank with a </i>
<i>suitable word.</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers


1- justice 4- integration
2- GDP 5- accelebrate
3- diverse 6- enterprises


<i><b>b. Task 2 (page 174)</b></i>


<i>Decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F).</i>


- Feedback and give correct answers
1- T 4- T


2- F ( 575.5 million) 5- F (The Hanoi Plan of Action)
3- T 6- F (among its member countries)


<i><b>c. Task 3 (page 175)</b></i>


<i>Answer the following questions.</i>


- Feedback and give answers



1- The original countries, namely, Indonesia, Malaysia, the Philippines,
Singapore and Thailand founded ASEAN.


2- The two main goals of the Association are to accelebrate the economic
growth, social progress and cultural development; and to promote peace
and stability through respect for justice and the rule of law in the


relationship among countries in the region.
3- It was about US $ 1405 billion.


4- It was adopted in 1998.


5- It includes trade, investment, industry, services, finance, agriculture,
rural development, forestry, energy, transportation and communication,
science and technology, small and medium interprises, and tourism.


<b>3. After you read (page 175)</b>


<i>Summarise the passage, based on the years: 1967, 1995, 1997, 1998, </i>
<i>1999, 2007, 2020.</i>


- Feedback
...


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>



- Practice reading at home


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

<b>P.D:</b><i><b>19.04.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>97:</b>

<b>Unit 16: </b>



<b>T.D:</b>...

<b> </b>

<b>the association of southeast asian nations</b>



<b> </b>

<b>Period 2</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>b - speaking</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Talking about some ASEAN countries based on the information given.
2. Education: - Knowing some more about ASEAN countries.



3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Pair, group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (1 st)


2- Read the passage then do task 3 (2 sts)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>



- Explain the require
- Sts study task 1 carefully
- Sts work in pairs


- Sts compare with other
pairs


- Sts talk about the name of
the country and its capital.
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study task 2
- T explains task 2
- T gives new words and
useful phrases


- T lets sts read after T
- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and help
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Task 1(page 175-176)</b>


<i>Discuss and write down the name of the country and its capital under </i>


<i>each national flag.</i>


- Feedback and give the answer


1- Malaysia – Kuala Lumpur 6- Thailand – Bangkok
2- The Philippines – Manila 7- Myanmar – Naypyidaw
3- Laos – Vientiane 8- Cambodia – Phnompenh
4- Singapore – Singapore 9- Brunei – Bandar Seri Begawan
5- Indonesia – Jakarta


<b>2. Task 2 (page 177)</b>


<i>Discuss and use the information in Task 1 and the facts below to talk </i>
<i>about some of the ASEAN countries.</i>


Eg: Malaysia has a total area of 33,252 sq.km. Its capital is Kuala


Lumpur. It has a population of 27,174,000. The official languages used in
Malaysia are Malay, English and Tamil. The main religions in Malaysia
are Islam and Buddhism. Ringgits (Malaysian dollars) are local currency
in Malaysia.


a- Presenting new words
- Islam (n): đạo hồi
- Buddhism (n): đạo phật
- Christianity (n): đạo cơ đốc
- Hinduism (n): đạo hin đu


- has a population/ a total area of : có …



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

- (…dollars) are local currency in …..
b- Feedback and give the suggestion


* The Philippines has a total area of 300,000 sq. km. Its capital is Manila.
It has a population of 88,875,000. The official languages spoken in The
Philippines are Filipino and English. The main religion in the Philipines
is Christianity. Its currency is Peso.


……..


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice speaking at home


- Do exercise part: Speaking in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 16– C- Listening


<b>P.D:20.04. 2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>98: Unit 16: </b>



<b>T.D:</b>...

<b> </b>

<b>the association of southeast asian nations</b>



<b> </b>

<b>Period 3</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>C- listening</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>



<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Listening to a conversation about English speaking and religions in ASEAN countries
then doing the tasks that follow.


2. Education: - Knowing some more about ASEAN countries.
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Pair, the whole class and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>



- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Task 2 (2 sts)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- T gives new words and
their meanings


- T lets sts practice
pronouncing.



<b>1. Before you listen (page 178)</b>


<i>a- Ask and answer the following questions.</i>


- Feedback


1- Some ASEAN countries such as the Philippines, Brunei, Singapore
and Malaysia use English as a second language.


* <i>Presenting new words</i>


- Buddhist (n): người theo đạo phật
- Muslim (n): người theo đạo hồi


- Catholic (n): người theo đạo thiên chúa


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

- Sts listen to the disk and
repeat twice


- Sts study task 1 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study task 2 carefully
- The whole class listen to
the disk twice


- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- Sts listen again and check
- T corrects mistakes
- Sts work in groups
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- predominantly (adv): trội, nổi bật
- summit (v): đệ trình, nộp


<i>* Listen and repeat</i>


<b>2. While you listen (page 178-179)</b>
<i><b>a, Task 1 (page 178)</b></i>


<i>Líten to the dialogue between Mr Hung and his daughter Nga, and </i>
<i>choose the best answer A, B or C to complete each of the following </i>
<i>sentences.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- C 4- A
2- A 5- B
3- C


<i><b>b, Task 2 (page 179)</b></i>


<i>Answer the following questions.</i>


- Feedback and give the suggested answers
1- Tomorrow (The next day).


2- The US.


3- Around 50 million.
4- In the Philippines.


5- Three – Islam, Buddhism and Catholicism.


<b>3. After you listen (page 179)</b>


<i>In your opinion, what do you think Nga’s essay will be about?</i>


- Feedback and give suggestions


Her essay will be about the culture and religions of the ASEAN
countries.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points



<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice listening at home


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 16 – D – Writing


<b>P.D:22.04.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>99: Unit 16: </b>



<b>T.D:</b>...

<b> </b>

<b>the association of southeast asian nations</b>



<b> </b>

<b>Period 4</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>d - writing</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>



1. Knowledge: - Writing a letter of recommendation.


2. Education: - Knowing how to write a letter of recommendation.
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice
- Individual, pair and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, lesson plan


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- New words (2 sts)


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task



-T explains the requirements
- Sts discuss in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts work in groups
- T goes around and helps
- Sts write individually
- T calls sts to write their
writing on the green board
- T corrects mistakes
- T collects some writings


<b>1. Task 1: (page 180)</b>


<i>Complete the letter of recommendation with the missing sentences in the </i>
<i>box.</i>


- Feedback and give the answers.


1- I would like to recommend a well-known place in Vietnam to you.
2- It is about 170 km from Hanoi.


3- The beach is an ideal place for swimmers.
4- People here are very friendly and hospitable.



5- I’m sure you will have a wonderful time here in Ha Long Bay.


<b>2. Taks 2 (page 180)</b>


<i>David, your pen pal, is going to spend his summer vacation in one of the </i>
<i>ASEAN countries. You want him to visit Vietnam. Write a letter to him </i>
<i>recommending a significant place you are familiar with. Use the out line </i>
<i>below.</i>


* Outline
1- Date
2- Salution


3- Body: - location


- natural features
- entertainment
- places to visit
- food


- people
- …..
4- Closing
5- Signature
* Feedback
……….


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>



- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Practice writing at home


- Do exercise part: Writing in workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Unit 16 – E – Language focus


<b>P.D:</b><i><b>24.04.2010</b></i>

<b>§</b>

<b>100: Unit 16: </b>



<b>T.D:</b>...

<b> </b>

<b>the association of southeast asian nations</b>



<b> </b>

<b>Period 5</b>

<b>: </b>

<b>E </b>

<b> language focus</b>



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>


<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

2. Education: - Comparing with Vietnamese
3. Skills: - Practical skills.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Presentation and practice


- Individual, pair and the whole class work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson </b></i>


1- Read your writing at home. (1 st)



III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T gives examples and lets
sts give their remarks
- T explains linking


- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts practise in turns


- T reviews grammar notes
- Sts answer questions:
1- What is an adverbial
clause of time?


2- How many adverb
conjuctions of time?
- Sts give examples


<b>1. Pronunciation(page 181) : The rising-falling tune </b>


<i>a, Definition</i>


- In choosing questions (Or questions)
Eg: Do you like ↑ pop or jazz music? ↓
- In sentences with <i><b>and, but</b></i>:


Eg: She is ↑ kind and generous. ↓



<i>b, Practise reading these sentences. (page 169)</i>


<b>2. Grammar (page 146 - 147): Adverbial clause of time</b>


<i>a, When</i>


* S + do …, S + do/ to be + doing/ will do
* S + did …, S + did/ was(were) doing/ had done
Eg: When I enter the room, all my students stand up.
When I lived in town, we often went to the theatre.


<i>b, While</i>


* S + do …, S + do/ to be doing


* S + to be doing …., S + to be doing…
* S + did …., S + did/ was(were) + doing


* S + was/ were doing …, S + was/ were + doing …


Eg: While my mother was cooking, my father was watering the flowers.


<i>c, As</i>


* S + do …., S + do/ will do


* S + did ….., S + did/ was (were) doing.


Eg: As she came to know her better, she relied on him more.



<i>d, Whenever</i>


* S + do …., S + do/ will do


Eg: Whenever he does, his mother watches him.


<i>e, Before</i>


* Doing …/ S + do …., S + do/ will do
* Doing …/ S + did …., S + had done
Eg: Before I go to school, I will pick you up.


You had closed all the doors before going to bed.


<i>f, After</i>


* Doing…/ S + had done …., S + did


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

- Sts study exercise 1
- Sts work pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study exercise 2
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about


their answers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study exercise 3
- Sts do exercise in pairs
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<i>h, As soon as/ until/ till/ as long as</i>


* S + do …., S + do/ will do
* S + did …., S + did…


Eg: As soon as I arrive there, I will phone you.
Until she spoke I realized that she wasn’t English.


<b>3. Doing exercises</b>
<i><b>a, Exercise 1 (page 182)</b></i>


<i>Complete each of the following sentences, using the suitable adverbial </i>
<i>clause of time in the box. Use each clause once only.</i>


- Feedback


1- as soon as she arrives in Ho Chi Minh City.
2- After the war was over



3- while they wewe on holiday.
4- Before you leave


5- till you get back


6- whenever we are in Hanoi
7- as long as imperialism exists
8- as he walked away


<i><b>b, Exercise 2 (page 183)</b></i>


<i>Supply the correct tense form of the verbs in brackets </i><b>.</b>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- arrives 5- have finished
2- arrives 6- had graduated
3- are playing 7- am


4- got 8- have read


<i><b>c, Exercise 3 (page 184)</b></i>


<i>Combine two sentences, using one as an adverbial clause of time with the</i>
<i>given conjunction.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- Let’s go out before it starts raining.



2- I’ll give you my address when I have found somewhere to live.
3- After he had done his homework, he went to bed.


4- We’ll let you know as soon as we have made our decision.
5- I haven’t met them since I left school.


6- Robert suddenly began to feel ill while he was doing the examination.
7- Kate will come back home after she has finished the last semester.


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo exercises at home


- Do exercises in workbook – part: Language focus


<b>P.D:25.04.2010 </b>

<b>§</b>

<b>101: </b>

<b>test yourself e</b>



<b>T.D: </b>…………<b> </b>
<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>


<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


1. Knowledge: - Sts check themselves the knowledge of English they have learnt in the three latest units
(unit 14 – unit 16).


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

3. Skills: - practical skills


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Testing yourself


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: textbooks and notebooks
- Teacher: textbook, disk and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting



- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (15 minute test)</b></i>


1. Give topics: two topics (handouts)
2. Answer keys and mark levels


- Part A: 1 point for each correct answer.
- Part B: 2 points for each correct answer.
* Topic 1:


A. 1- T 2- T 3- F 4- F
B. 1- Because people traveled by horse so they drove on the left and needed the right hand to hold the
sword in case of trouble.


2- He insisted that his armies traveled on the right.
3- 50.


* Topic 2:


A. 1- T 2- F 3- T 4- F
B. 1- He was born in Joplin, Missouri.


2- He was 19 years old.


3- He wrote an autobiography and published his collections of poetry.


III. New lesson




<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the task


- Sts listen to the disk twice
- Sts do the task individually
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
carefully


- Sts read the passage
- Sts work individually
- S compares with a partner
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes
- Sts study the task
- Sts work in pairs
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Listening (page 185) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i>Listen and fill in the blanks with the information as you hear.</i>



- Feedback and give the correct answers


1- 16 November 1945 4- teacher-training
2- 193 5- heritage


3- 60


<b>2. Reading (page 195-186) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i>Read the text then answer the questions that follow.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- Arab countries.


2- In textile, toy, shoe and electronic sectors.
3- 70%


4- They depended on their husbands or fathers.


5- The access to education and change in economic status.


<b>3. Grammar (page 187) (2.5 points) – 10 minutes</b>


<i>Use the following phrasal verbs to complete the sentences below.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
2- stay on 7- Watch out
3- wait up 8- cool off
4- give in 9- keep up


5- catch up 10- fall behind
6- speak up


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

- Sts work individually
- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their answers


- T collects and corrects
some writings


<i>In about 120 words, write about the changes in women’s role in the </i>
<i>family in comparison with that 50 years ago..</i>


* Suggestions: The following cues might be useful to you.
- Education - Economic dependence
- Social activities - Number of children
- Work - Domestic chores
* Mark levels


- Structures: 1 point
- Content: 0.5 point
- Vocabulary: 1 point


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>



- Redo exercises at home
- Revise for the next period.


<b>P.D:12.4 2010 </b>

<b>§</b>

<b>102</b>

:

<b>Revision 1 for the second term test</b>


T.D:



<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


- Revising the main points and doing exercise 1, 2


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Individual, pair and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: notebooks


- Teacher: handouts and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting



- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6
- Chatting


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T guides sts to revise for
their first term test at home


<b>1. Guiding to revise for the first term test</b>


- Pronuciation and stress: + -s, -es, -ed, simple sounds
+ stress in two syllable words
- Reading: + Part A ( unit 1 – unit 15)


- Grammar: + verb tenses
+ reported speech
+ passive voice


+ conditional sentences


+ relative promouns and relative clauses
+ although / because


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

- T gives sts handouts
- Sts study exercise 1 and do


it in pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their asnwers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study exercise 2 and do
it in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their asnwers


- T corrects mistakes


+ phrasal verbs


+ Gerund & to infinitive
- Part E (unit 1 – unit 15)


<b>2. Doing exercises </b>(Handout):


<i><b>a- Exerise 1: </b>Put the verbs in the correct tense</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- goes 6- have given
2- shall/ will lend 7- has worked


3- arrives 8- had finished/ finished


4- like 9- have finished


5- see 10- have been/ will let


<i><b>b- Exerise 2: </b>Use the given words to worite complete sentences. Do some</i>
<i>alteration or addition when necessary.</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers


1. She used to play football with her friends when she was small.
2. It took them years to build the house.


3. The accident happened while he was driving on the highway.
4. When I saw her she was talking to the teacher.


5. Did you hear the news on the radio this morning?
6. She is always on good terms with her neighbours.
7. We donot know when the manager returns.


8. The doctor whom you saw at the party is my friend.
9. The train is going to arrive in Hanoi in two hours.
10. When did you start learning English?


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


-Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo excercises at home


- Prepair for the next period


<b>P.D: 13.4.2012 </b>

<b>§</b>

<b>103</b>

:

<b>Revision 2 for the second term test</b>


T.D:



<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


- Doing exercise 3, 4, 5


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


- Individual, pair and group work


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>



- Students: notebooks


- Teacher: handouts and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6
- Chatting


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T gives sts handouts
- Sts study exercise 3 and do
it in pairs


- T calls sts to talk about
their asnwers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study exercise 4 and do
it in pairs



- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their asnwers


- T corrects mistakes


- Sts study exercise 5 and do
it in pairs


- T goes around and helps
- T calls sts to talk about
their asnwers


- T corrects mistakes


<b>1. Exercise 3 (</b>Handout): <i><b>Put who, where, which, whose to complete the</b></i>
<i><b>sentences</b></i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1- where 6- who
2- who 7- which
3- which 8- where
4- whose 9- who
5- who 10- whose


<b>2. Exercise 4 </b>(Handout): <i>Combine the sentences using relative pronouns</i>.
- Feedack and give the correct answers


1. The soup which I had for lunch was too salty.
2. The pill which I took made me sleepy.



3. Many men who went on strike were in fact willing to accept the
company’s revised pay offer.


4. The girl who lives next to my house is very friendly.
5. A lion is an animal which lives in Africa.


6. The woman whose son works with me in a factory predicted my future.
7. The bus which I take to school every morning is always crowded.
8. This is a picture of the village where we grew.


9. He gave orders to the manager who passed them on to the supervisors.
10. Tom, whose car broke down, had been driving all day.


11. The woman whose health has’t been good recently has gone into
hospital for some tests.


12. That man whose name I can’t remember over there is an artist.
13. I went to see the doctor who told me to rest for a few days.


<b>3. Exercise 5 </b>(Handout): <i>Complete the sentences using one of these </i>
<i>phasal verbs (in the correct forms)</i>


- Feedback and give the correct answers
1. broke down 9. fill in it
2. turn up 10. crossed it out
3. moving in 11. made it up
4. closed down 12. give her back
5. dropped out 13. see her off
6. showed off 14. gave them away


7. dozed off 15. show you around
8. clears up 16. turned it down


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


-Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo excercises at home
- Prepair for the next period


<b>P.D:20.04.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>104: </b>

<b>The second term test</b>


<i><b>T.D: 24.4.2010</b></i>


<i><b>Clas</b></i>
<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>3</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>4</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>5</b></i>


<i><b>12A</b></i>
<i><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>



<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


-Check sts’ knowledge of English from unit 1 to unit 15.
- Assess sts’ in the second term.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

- Multiple choice test


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: pens


- Teacher: English paper test, topics and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting


- Checking the attendance: 12A3 12A4
12A5 12A6


<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- T gives sts requirements
- T gives sts test papers


- Sts do the test individually
- T collects test papers.


<b>1. Topics: - </b>4 topics<i>(handouts)<b> </b></i>
<b>2. Mark levels and answer keys.</b>
<i><b>a,Mark levels</b></i>


- 0.2 point for each correct answer.


<i><b>b,Answer keys: Topic 279</b></i>


1- B 11- B 21- B 31- A 41- D
2- D 12- A 22- B 32- B 42-C
3- C 13- A 23- C 33- B 43- A
4- A 14- D 24- A 34- A 44- D
5- B 15- A 25- B 35- A 45- C
6- A 16- A 26- A 36- B 46- A
7- D 17- A 27- A 37- A 47- B
8- A 18- D 28- C 38- A 48- B
9- A 19- D 29- B 39- A 49- C
10- C 20- D 30- B 40- D 50- D


<i><b>IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo the test at home



<b>P.D:1.5.2010</b>

<b>§</b>

<b>105: </b>

<b>paying back the first term test</b>



<b>T.D</b>
<i><b>Clas</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>3</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>4</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>5</b></i> <i><b>12A</b><b>6</b></i>
<i><b>Date</b></i>


<b>A. Aims of the lesson</b>


- Paying English papers back to sts.


- Correcting common mistakes and giving remarks on the test.
- Giving answer keys.


<b>B.Teaching methods</b>


-


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Students: pens


- Teacher: English papers and lesson plan


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>
<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>


- Greeting



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

<i><b>II. Checking the previous lesson (No)</b></i>


III. New lesson



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


- Sts study the test


- Sts compare with a partner
- T gives remarks on the test
- T gives answer keys
- T corrects common
mistakes


1- Paying back the English papers
2- Giving remarks on the test.


- Students: lazy and lack of knowledge
- Best part:


- Worst part :
- Best work:
- Worst work:


3- Correct common mistakes
-


-
-




<i><b>-IV. Consolidation</b></i>


- Summarize the main points


<i><b>V. Homework</b></i>


- Redo the test at home


</div>

<!--links-->

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×